Home

Hitachi CP-X5021N

1. 7 es vvv W u W W W Tim 71 TI WO MY MEMORY _ BE EF BE EF PICTURE MODE BE EF EE EE EE EE 01 36 EE 01 00 01 36 EE 1 36 B aa W U 1 71 m m F 02 00 01 36 continued on next page 29 Names Operation Type Leader Command Data i d CRC Type Setting code COMPUTER IN1 FA 38 00 00 COMPUTER IN2 04 00 LAN 0B 00 USB TYPE A 06 00 EE MY SOURCE EE E E E E E E Set _USB TYPE B OC 00 HDMI 03 00 COMPONENT AA 3B 01 00 05 00 S VIDEO 02 00 VIDEO 01 00 01 00 Ge 00 00 Ge 00 00 e ee mn mm t e t Magnify Position increment 00 00 Decrement Get t t Magnify Position increment Decrement CC 30 E REMOTE FREQ Se 2 NORMAL 2 m m 7 G e O e O O FF N FF REMOTE FREQ S N HIGH FF 2 E u m m 00 00 01 00 00 00 O IMAGE 1 01 00 MVINAGE MACE 01 00 02 00 E E E E G WO mn mm WO IMAGE 3 03 00 IMAGE 4 04 00 Get 02 00 00 00 MY IMAGE MY IMAGE 3 MY IMAGE MY IMAGE 30 PJEimk command Control Description Parameter or Response 0 Standb POWR Power Contorol Sy 1 Power On 0 Standby POWR Power Status inquiry 1 Power On 2 Cool Down 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 21 COMPONENT 22 S VIDEO INPT Input Source selection 23 VIDEO 31 HDMI 41 USB TYPE A 51 LAN 52 USB TYPE B 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 21 COMPONENT 22 S VIDEO INPT Input Source inquiry 23
2. When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Select the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password 8 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 e The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu l3 Oe NGONO BOS SUI areola This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface Using the NETWORK BRIDGE function a computer that is connected with this projector by Ethernet communication can control an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication as a network terminal TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data Mm 4 Ethernet RS 232C a RS 232C cable External device eee CONTROL port 6 1 Connecting devices 1 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable for Ethernet communication 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL po
3. AUDIO IN3 AUDIS OUT R AUDIO IN1 X AUDIO IN2 L COMPUTER IN2 G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr H V e BNC jack x 5 e Video Analog 0 7Vp p 75Q terminator e H V sync TTL level positive negative e Composite sync TTL level COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr RCA jack x3 e System 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 7200p 50 60 1080i 50 60 1080p 50 60 Port Signal Y Component video Y 1 0 0 1Vp p with composite sync 75Q terminator Cb Pb Component video Cb Pb 0 7 0 1Vp p 750 terminator Cr Pr_ Component video Cr Pr 0 740 1Vp p 75Q terminator S VIDEO Jas Mini DIN 4pin jack _0 e System NTSC PAL SECAM PAL M PAL N NTSC4 43 PAL 60Hz Signal Color signal 0 286Vp p NTSC burst 75Q terminator Color signal 0 300Vp p PAL SECAM burst 75Q terminator Brightness signal 1 0Vp p 75Q terminator 3 Ground 4 Ground VIDEO RCA jack e System NTSC PAL SECAM PAL M PAL N NTSC4 43 PAL 60Hz e 1 0 0 1Vp p 75Q terminator 4 USB TYPEA DC5V 0 5A HDMI USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 GIY B Cb Pb R Cr Pr HDMI Tyo e Type Digital audio video connector e Audio signal Linear PCM Sampling rate 32 44 1 48 kHz Lae eee 1 TM D S Data2 8 T M D S Data0 Shield 15 SCL_ _ 2 TM D S Data2 Shield 9 T M D S Data0 16 SDA 5V Power 6 TM D S Datat
4. The projector does not recognize the USB storage device inserted into USB TYPE A port Use the REMOVE USB function first remove the USB storage device and then insert it into the port again 12 80 Before removing the USB storage device be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen which appears when the USB TYPE A port is selected as the input SOUICE continued on next page 100 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Cases not involving a machine defect ee Video screen The FREEZE function is working 28 display freezes Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal Color settings are not correctly adjusted Colors have a Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR TEMP COLOR faded out TINT and or COLOR SPACE settings using the menu functions appearance or Color tone is COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable poor Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO RGB SMPTE240 REC709 or REC601 The brightness and or contrast are adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS and or CONTRAST settings to a higher level using the menu function OO Co oO oO Pictures appear aak The projector is operating in Eco mode Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF in the SETUP menu The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime Replace the lamp aN A A 89 90 Either the focus and or horizo
5. continued on next page 46 ltem scription O O O O Using the A V buttons switches the mode for the HDMI audio HDMI AUDIO Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMI audio device 1 amp 2 Using the A V buttons switches the input level to match that of the microphone connected to the MIC port MIC LEVEL HIGH amp LOW HIGH for a microphone with an amplifier LOW for a microphone without an amplifier Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the volume of the microphone MIC VOLUME connected to the MIC port Low High 47 SNAN MONU From the SCREEN menu items shown in the table LANGUAGE below can be performed MAGE MENU POSITION Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and i En S START LP press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to a anie n execute the item Then perform it according to the W SECURITY E TEMPLATE TEST PATTERN ace following table COMPUTERIN I 10240 768 50Hr ltem escription Using the A gt buttons switches the OSD On Screen Display language LANGUAGE ENGLISH amp FRAN AIS amp DEUTSCH ESPANOL shown in the LANGUAGE dialog Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting Using the A W lt gt buttons adjusts the menu position MENU POSITION To quit the operation press the MENU button on the remote control or keep no operation for about 10 seconds Using the A V buttons switches the mo
6. 1 6 Manual Configuration svessimocassunaninceticismsncudatocumvbietaddnsduseisuntybuetiarceinubtoniacents 23 16 1 Prois COnmecHON reece scien epee scence O NS 23 16 2 ASOV COMMSCUOM esinaine N EAEE AREA EANN 24 1 7 Configuring the network settings Manually cccceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeens 25 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 30 1 8 1 Connection and WANSIMISSION scccaceccecenerisencnesgenact lt ceesksnanssteetaseseesecsariasiaeoeeieaeenseaduseedeanies 30 183 2 GOmectUon STON acson E E E a Ei 32 TS PONS GA irge N E N A 33 1 9 1 Outline of Profile data ce ccinccscescateosdntehatencbiedriontatexbadeniecubidandal exetetsiarebiaesiabessmtiorometibxaateat 33 1 9 2 Making Profil Gate crcrcssancotensssnctdecuseneoneeds tabs dasennsinad abaeneeanieaiuandleuneabeananeeeeamsasaneaninuadnancnts 33 NO xo EdiHng Prone Gai 2522 csscnccensd vateanraveaeaieees seas edeasccoc ondeanaua dosipadeacsatane ave etndeneesaiaseenar ace 34 1 9 4 Registering My Connection ccciccecrsoredvese sacavecccbestenccareseessivescas caveanoneadsasarnderssadeadiashanavateesines 35 2 Network Presentation ussuussnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 37 2 1 Using the LiveViewer osennesessenernesnnsernsrsrssressrrerrssnrnsrronrrrsrrsnrernreenns STA 2 1 1 Main menu and Operating buttons scriscudiinscardaeancensciaases lonadeeday suxtcunetesiabCedeetaunrustccotadtedeon oT 21 2 Displaying e S
7. MENU Reset MyScreen ORIGINAL BE EF BLANK Set BLUE BE EF WHITE BE EF BLACK BE EF BE EF E EF F 01 00 00 00 01 00 EE 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 02 00 00 00 G et aie a aer BLANK On Off O Get MyScreen Set ORIGINAL START UP OFF Get O O et O O FF Ea D w w w m m m m T T E E EE i vv U U v m m m m Ty T1 Tm Tm T E E E E Set FF G FF Get continued on next page 27 Li i W U U ninin E E E E E E U TI Names Operation Type Header Command Data CRC Type Setting code TEST PATTERN BE EF 00 00 DOT LINE1 B 01 00 DOT LINE2 B 02 00 DOT LINES 03 00 Set ___DOT LINE4 04 00 TEMPLATE CIRCLE 1 05 00 CIRCLE 2 01 00 06 00 MAP 1 10 00 MAP 2 01 00 11 00 STACK 20 00 G 02 00 00 00 00 00 E EF BE EF BE EF 06 63 01 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 E EF E EF BE EF BE EF BE EF E EF ee Execute BE EF 06 00 58 DC 06 00 30 70 00 00 FILTER TIME Get BE EF 06 00 C2 FO 02 00 AO 10 00 00 fg Execute BE EF 06 00 98 c6 06 oo 40 70 00 00 W Tl T1 TI W TI E E E E E E W U T 11 E E W TI TEST PATTERN DOT LINE1 DOT LINE2 DOT LINES DOT LINE4 BE EF CIRCLE 1 CIRCLE 2 MAPI MAP2 STACK _ E E E E E E E E E E E E WO TI E E E E E E E W TI
8. MICE AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 3 5 stereo mini jack e 200 mVrms 47KQ terminator QDAUDIO IN3 R L K AUDIO OUT R L RCA jack x2 RCA jack x2 e 200 mVrms 47KQ terminator e 200 mVrms 1kQ output impedance MIC 3 5 mono mini jack lt Low level gt e 2 mVrms 1kQ terminator lt High level gt e 20 mVrms 1kQ terminator REMOTE CONTROL K IN L OUT 3 5 stereo mini jack e To be connected with the remote control that came with the projector USB TYPEA DC5V 0 5A HDMI USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 GIY B Cb Pb R Cr Pr AUDIO IN3 AUDIO IN1 d USB TYPE A USB TYPE B ORS USB A type jack 0600 poe eype lack ETE Pin Signal 1 sv 2l 1 5V e About the details of RS 232C communication O 00000 O00 please refer to the section RS 232C Communication Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal afo 5 Ground srs 3 6 Noconnection 9 No connection LAN RJ 45 jack QQOQOOOO CONTROL D sub 9pin plug Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 TX 4 7 l 2 mx Jsp dep 3 RX fT 6 RX To input SCART RGB signal ex SCART SCART connector jack SCART cable USB TYPE A DC5V 0 5A To input SCART RGB signal to the projector use a SCART to RCA cable Connect the plugs refer to above ex For more reference please consult your dealer RNS AOYA
9. OFF When set to the ON the lamp in projector will be automatically turned on without the usual procedure 118 only when the projector is DIRECT POWER supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on ON e This function does not work as long as the power has been supplied to the projector while the lamp is off e After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function if neither input nor operation is detected for about 30 minutes the projector is turned off even though the AUTO POWER OFF function 255 is disabled continued on next page 54 ttem i escription Using the A V buttons adjusts the time to count down to automatically turn the projector off Long max 99 minutes Short F min 0 minute DISABLE ENABLE 4 DRE TURN FPERIT ic RETURN ec EMIT AUTO POWER When the time is set to 0 the projector is not turned off automatically OFF When the time is set to 1 to 99 and when the passed time with no signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time the projector lamp will be turned off If one of the projector s buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the commands except get commands is transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time projector will not be turned off Please refer to the section Turning off the power L18 Using the A V buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port To use this function you need to c
10. Please check and clean the air filter periodically When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible The air filter of this projector consists of a filter cover and a filter unit with two types of filter If one or both of the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace the filter unit with a new one Request for a filter unit with the following type number from your dealer when purchasing a new unit Type number MU06641 Filter unit The specified filter unit also comes with a replacement lamp for this projector Please replace the filter unit as well when you replace the lamp 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Pick and pull up the filter cover knobs to take it off Press up slightly the bottom side knobs to unlock the bottom side of the filter unit Pull the center knob to take the filter unit off Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector and the outer side of the filter unit Filter cover knobs Filter unit Filter unit The filter unit consists of two parts Press knobs down around the interlocking parts to unlock then separate the two parts Interlocking Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side of parts 27 eee each part of the filter unit to clean them up If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace t
11. VIDEO 31 HDMI 41 USB TYPE A 51 LAN 52 USB TYPE B 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on 20 Mute off AVMT AV Mute 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on AVMT Mien oe 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on continued on next page 31 Commands Control Description Parameter or Response si Control Commands Control Description Parameter or Response si Parameter or Response 1st byte Refers to Fan error one of 0 to 2 2nd byte Refers to Lamp error one of 0 to 2 byte Refers to Temptrature error one of 0 to ERST 4th byte Refers to Cover error one of 0 to 2 Error Status inquiry oth byte Refers to Filter error one of 0 to 2 6th byte Refers to Other error one of 0 to 2 The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below 0 Error is not detected 1 Warning 2 Error LAMP EE E E T Gul 1st number digits 1 to 5 Lamp Time P ae 2nd number 0 Lamp off 1 Lamp on INST Input Source List inquiry 11 12 21 22 23 31 41 51 52 NAME Projector Name inquiry Sete P set in PROJECTOR INF1 Manufucturer s Name HITACHI inquiry Your model name CP X4021N CP X5021N or CP WX4021N INFO Other Information inquiry Shenae with the factory information and so CLSS _ Class Information inquiry INF2 Model Name inquiry NOTE The password used in PJLink is the same as the password set in the Web Browser Control To use PJLink without
12. 2 Choose a history record listed in the window C conige hitwork Settings Miray O enek Comet ot 3 Click the Connect 4 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 If you want to copy a history record to a profile data select one of the history record and click the Register to profile The profile data cannot be erased automatically NOTE The number of the history record is maximum 10 for each network adapter When the 11th data is stored the oldest record among the 10 will be overwritten e The date amp time information in each history record is renewed when the network is connected by using the history record e If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied e Even if you use the profile connection it will be memorized as a history record 24 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually Pro kin ahi IZDA 3 pa Pr Prafie 11 30 2000 21941 PM Last connected Projector 1 192 168 1 101 Li SO 2008 Sa Pe Projector 15 LES 1 10 11 00 3 72 24 PM Liao anos S214 PM All setting for the network connection between the projector and computer is input manually Select the Configure Network Settings Manually ez 163 1 103 The information to be input manually is different depending on how you w
13. 9715 NOTE Command control is available only via the specified port above Command Control Settings 150 Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 6 Click the Apply button to save the settings 84 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 160 7 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 8 Click the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password See NOTE 9 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716
14. AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO AUDIO SOURCE STANDBY HDMI AUDIO Selects the HDMI audio setting MIC LEVEL Selects the microphone level MIC VOLUME Adjusts the microphone volume setting SCREEN LANGUAGE Selects the language for the OSD MENU POSITION V Adjusts the vertical Menu position MENU POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal Menu position BLANK Selects the Blank mode START UP Selects the start up screen mode MyScreen Lock Turns MyScreen lock function on off MESSAGE Turns the message function on off TEMPLATE Selects the template setting C C DISPLAY Selects Closed Caption DISPLAY setting C C MODE Selects Closed Caption MODE setting C C CHANNEL Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE LAN input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE A input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE HDMI input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPONENT input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode 64 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description OPTION AUTO SEARCH Turns the automatic signal search function on off AUTO KEYSTONE La the automatic keystone distortion correction function DIRECT POWER ON Turn
15. AUDION AUDIO e SOURCE AUDIO IN3 6E DC 01 00 B COMPUTER IN1 E E E E WO TI W UJ m m T T AUDIO IN1 AUDIO AUDIO IN2 t t S t SOURCE B t t t WO TI E E E E E E E E E E COMPUTER IN2 E E AUDIO1 BE EF 4A DE AUDIO2 BE EF BE EF BE EF C O AUDIO se AVDIO1 BE EF SOURCE USB gt _ AUDIO BE 06 00 06 00 03 o6 00 45 DD 02 o0 36 20 00 00 OF 03 06 00 AE DE 01 o0 3c 20 00 00 AUDIO g _ AubIo1_ BE E 06 00 01 00 SOURCE USB EE 06 00 1 00 TYPE B E EF 03 06 00 5E DE 01 00 03 o6 00 9D DE 02 00 3c 20 00 00 AUDIO Set SOURCE LAN k AUDIO2 W W WW U U m m m m TI TI Ty 71 71 E AUDIO3 EE TYPEA t FF N N FF FF FF FF FF FF viv v v v mm mm Tinm m Tmn T W m m TI 7 continued on next page 25 Names Operation Type Leader Command Data j i Type Seting code OFF 06 00 00 00 AUDIO1 03 06 00 2A DC 01 00 33 20 01 00 AUDIO2 03 06 00 DA DC 01 00 33 20 02 00 AUDIO3 03 00 AUDIO_HDMI 20 00 t 00 00 AUDIO IN1 01 00 01 00 AUDIO AUDIO IN2 02 00 SOURCE AUDIO IN3 01 00 03 00 COMPONENT OFF 00 00 Get T a 02 00 00 00 AUDIO IN 01 00 AUDIO IN2 AUDIOINS BE EF OFF E EF Get AUDIO IN1 BE EF AUDIO IN2 BE EF AUDIO IN3 F2 DC OFF 02 DC Get I z 31 DC 02 00 AUDIO IN1 7A DF 3F 20 01 00 AUDIO AUDIO IN2 8A DF 01 00 02 00 SOURCE et F AUDIO IN3 1A DE 03
16. Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f727581 3d4bde in front of the commands and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde commanad 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection 14 Netwonk Bridge Communication This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function When the projector connects to the computer by LAN communicaton an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal For details see the 3 7 Controlling the external device via the projector using the NETWORK BRIDGE function Network Guide Connection 1 Connect the computer s LAN port and the projector s LAN port with a LAN cable Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the RS 232C port of the devices that you want to control with a RS 232C cable 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on 4 Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE EQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide Hi i U Communication settings For communication setting use the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu LQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUN
17. E V INVERT 02 00 H amp V INVERT 01 00 01 30 03 00 Get 00 00 O oO es OJO O STANDBY Set NORMAL 01 00 01 60 00 00 MODE SAVING 01 00 Get 02 00 00 00 continued on next page 23 Names Operation Type Leader Command Data i d CRC Type Setting code VONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 06 00 3E F4 01 00 00 00 KE a OFF BEEF FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 oe ene OFF BE EF FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 COMPONENT OFF BE EF 01 00 FF 00 Get BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 86 F5 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 S VIDEO OFF BE EF Get COMPUTER IN1 B MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 OFF Get COMPUTERI BE EF MONITOR OUT Set __COMPUTER2 BE EF OFF BE EF Get BE EF 00 00 COMPUTERI BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 04 00 OFF BE EF FF 00 Get BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER1 BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 04 00 USB TYPE A OFF BE EF FF 00 Get BE EF 02 00 00 00 COMPUTER1 BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER2 BE EF 01 00 0400 USB TYPE B OFF BE EF FF 00 Get BE EF 02 00 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set _ COMPUTER IN2 BE_EF STANDBY OFF Get Get COMPUTER Ni Get BE EF COMPUTER IN2 _ _lerement E EF 03 06 00 Decrement E 06 00 et 06 00 02 00 Increment 06 00 04 00 00 00 Decrement 06 00 05 00 00 00 Get
18. ECO MODE Selects the eco mode MIRROR Selects the mirror status STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input COMPUTER IN1 port is selected MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input COMPUTER IN2 port is selected MONITOR OUT LAN ht MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is MONITOR OUT USB Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input TYPEA port is selected MONITOR OUT USB Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input TYPE B port is selected MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI input port is HDMI selected MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPONENT input COMPONENT port is selected MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S VIDEO input port is S VIDEO selected MONITOR OUT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is VIDEO selected MONITOR OUT I STANDBY Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting 63 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume setting SPEAKER Turns the built in speaker on off AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 input port AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 AUDIO SOURCE LAN AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE A AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B AUDIO SOURCE HDMI AUDIO SOURCE COMPONENT
19. It magnifies picture Large It reduces picture e This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal OVER SCAN e For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals continued on next page 36 ltem scription O O O O O Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the vertical position Down Up e Over adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the vertical position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN 4436 setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the horizontal position Right Left e Over adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is H POSITION selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting
20. Operating Guide e Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port e If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port use a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device e If a loud feedback noise is produced from the speaker move the microphone away from the speaker e This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone Connecting power supply 1 Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC inlet of the projector 2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the outlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated the connection of the power supply Cord make the projector turn on AAWARNING P Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock e Only use the power cord that came with the projector If it is damaged consult your dealer to get a new one e Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the power cord for complete separation e Never modify the power cord Turning on the power 1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector and the outlet 9 Make sure that the POWER indicator is ST
21. This projector is not equipped with a lock for vertical lens position 23 Using the automatic adjustment feature Press AUTO button on the remote control Pressing this button performs the following O For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting O For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu 2140 The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default O For a component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted e The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input e When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture e When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the PC model e The items adjusted by this functio
22. USB TYPE B port Press the ASPECT button on the remote control Each time you press the button the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen size Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture Turn the VERTICAL adjuster fully counter clockwise Then turn it clockwise and adjust the vertical lens position upward Turn the LOCK counter clockwise to loosen the lock of the HORIZONTAL adjuster Turn the HORIZONTAL adjuster clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust the horizontal lens position Turn the LOCK fully clockwise to tighten it and lock the horizontal lens position continued on next page 10 VOLUME button VOLUME button MUTE button INPUT button Va 3 Y VIDEO button COMPUTER button ASPECT button FOCUS ring ZOOM ring LOCK horizontal lens position lock HORIZONTAL adjuster VERTICAL adjuster Displaying the picture continued ACAUTION gt If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector s lamp is on use one of methods below Use the supplied lens cover Use the BLANK function see User s Manual Operating Guide Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector IL mr O Z LL NOTE The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted e For the details of how to adjust the
23. any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LA
24. click the Browse and select another folder Seba all ripia L pysia in Bhat Plaag hoia Tie mihiak by hri ikide check Heed To alal k diair Robber iiih Eiiisari aie dk another Fodder 8 Confirm the program folder name If Projector Sani Tools is okay press the Next to continue If not enter the desired folder name and then press the Next 9 The Hardware Installation dialog appears Press Continue Anyway Seep oa mags iame tha Pen bd on ns ane kiin NOTE After sequence 8 the Windows Security dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Please click the Install this driver software anyway and continue installation 10 After a moment installation will complete and the Setup Complete dialog will appear as shown on the right Click the Finish This completes the software installation Then your computer automatically restarts 1 To confirm that the software has been properly installed press the Start button on the toolbar select All Programs and then select the Projector Tools folder 2 The LiveViewer will appear in that folder if the installation was successful 1 2 2 Updating the LiveViewer Please check and get the latest version at Hitachi Web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Some functions explained in this manual require the LiveViewer Version 4 xx In the version information a number betwe
25. down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Pick and pull up the filter cover knobs to take it off Press up slightly the bottom side knobs to unlock the bottom side of the filter unit Pull the center knob to take the filter unit off Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent of the projector and the outer side of the filter unit The filter unit consists of two parts Press down around the interlocking parts to unlock then separate the two parts Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side of each part of the filter unit to clean them up If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace them with the new ones 8 Combine the two parts to reassemble the filter unit Q Put the filter unit back into the projector Filter cover knobs Filter unit gt Filter unit knobs Interlocking ay eae o ew continued on next page 14 Cleasning and replacing the air filter continued 1 0 Put the filter cover back into the place 1 1 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the A cursor buttons then press the gt cursor or the ENTER the RESET button A dialog will appear 3 Press the cursor button to select the OK on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time L mr O Z LL AWARNING P Before taking care of the air filter mak
26. ea 11 5 AUDIO IN3 AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN1 R R 1 T 0 0 7 CONTROL 1 3 8 14 9 15 19 16 continued on next page Part names continued Remote control 1 VIDEO button 220 2 COMPUTER button 20 3 SEARCH button 21 4 STANDBY ON button 118 5 ASPECT button 21 6 AUTO button 0124 7 BLANK button 128 8 MAGNIFY ON button 27 9 MAGNIFY OFF button 027 10 MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button 20 58 11 VOLUME button 419 12 PAGE UP button 017 13 PAGE DOWN button 17 4 VOLUME button 119 5 MUTE button 179 6 FREEZE button 128 7 MY BUTTON 1 button 57 8 MY BUTTON 2 button L457 9 KEYSTONE button L425 0 POSITION button 424 30 1 MENU button 129 A lt 4 cursor buttons 2129 3 ENTER button 129 4 ESC button 30 5 RESET button 130 26 Battery cover L16 1 1 1 17 1 1 2 2 22 23 2 25 2 2 10 1 s 7 4 6 3 5 7 16 12 8 14 9 11 19 13 17 13 20 18 22 21 24 25 Back of the remote control SCN Uo Install the projector according to the environment and manner the projector will be used in For the case of installation in a special state s
27. modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 1 of the License or at your option any later version This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the library if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library Frob a library for tweaking knobs written by James Random Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1990 Ty Coon President of Vice That s all there is to it This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org Copyright 1998 2008 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMP
28. perdita di dati perdita di precisione o perdita di compatibilit con l interfaccia tra altri programmi risultante dal software in oggetto e o dall utilizzo di tale software nei limiti consentiti dalla legge applicabile ITALI ANO Avtale om sluttbrukerlisens for projektorens programvare Programvaren i projektoren bestar av flere uavhengige programvaremoduler og v re opphavsrettigheter og eller tredjeparts opphavsrettigheter finnes for hver slik programvaremodul Projektoren bruker ogs programvaremoduler som vi har utviklet og eller laget Og v re opphavsrettigheter og ndsverk for hver slik programvare og relaterte enheter inkludert men ikke begrenset til programvarerelaterte dokumenter finnes Rettighetene over er beskyttet av lover om opphavsrettighet og andre tilgjengelige lover Og projektoren bruker programvaremoduler som er lisensiert under GNU General Public Lisence Version 2 og GNU Lesser General Public Version 2 1 etablert av Free Software Foundation inc U S A eller lisensavtaler for hver programvare Se den f lgende websiden for lisensavtaler for slike programvaremoduler og annen programvare Webadresse http av hitachi com projector index html Kontakt din forhandler for innspill ang ende lisensiert programvare Se lisensavtalene for hver programvare i de f lgende sidene 75 og lisensavtalene for hver programvare p websiden for detaljer om lisensforholdene og s videre Ettersom de f lgende lisensavt
29. select some images in the Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC LESS Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source lil a D Thumbnail menu Selected image mi Ss ogg a i eco a ele la E mi REMOVE LESE Thumbnail images 78 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by buttons or keys You can control the images in the Thumbnail screen with the remote control or keypad or a web browser software The following functions can be supported while the Thumbnail is displayed Button operation The remote The keypad on Web Remote in web Functions control the projector browser software AlV lt gt AlV lt 4 gt UP DOWN LEFT RIGHT Move cursor PAGE UP PAGE UP PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN Switches pages e Displays the selected image on the Full Screen mode when a cursor is on a thumbnail image e Displays the SETUP menu next for the selected image when a cursor is on a thumbnail image number The SETUP menu for the selected image Functions Use the lt gt cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the gt cursor button to execute the functions as follows RETURN o gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file L85 Switch to ON to set the
30. 00 STANDBY FF EA DE 00 00 T D9 DE 00 00 AE C6 01 00 5E C6 02 00 Fi 00 00 o F1 00 00 Decrement C2 FO H5 HER EN aes 01 00 10 00 0A 00 SVENSKA 01 00 0B 00 0D C7 00 00 ENGLISH BE EF F7 D3 FRAN AIS E EF DEUTSCH__ BE EF ESPA OL E EF ITALIANO _ BE EF LANGUAGE eta PYCCKUI EEF OC 00 Sree Geen a oo i D Sal aa eo EE aa foo ep eae WW eepe N m TI ugu O Sa ugu AA aol or I wo ep D iia alm uigu e TI W w D aoa af orf or eee U es 92 FO 01 00 o 00 00 NEDERLANDS Set PORTUGU S 09 00 02 F1 00 00 NORSK EEF SUOMI 01 00 0D 00 m Tl u u u u u u u u NOTE Not all of the languages in this table are supported sis Not all NOTE Not all of the languages in this table are supported sis the languages in this table are supported continued on next page 26 Command Data Nam ration T Header Operation Type CRC Action Type Setting code POLSKI BE EF 03 OE 00 T RK E BE EF OF 00 DANSK BE EF 11 00 ESKY BE EF 12 00 MAGYAR BE EF 13 00 ROM N BE EF 14 00 SLOVENSKI BE EF 01 00 15 00 LANGUAGE set HRVATSKI __ BE EF 16 00 EAAHNIKA BE EF 01 00 17 00 LIETUVI BE EF 18 00 EESTI BE EF 01 00 19 00 LATVIE U BE EF 1A 00 ma BE EF IJJ esi huusi PORTUGUES BRA Get NOTE Not all of the languages in this table are supported Get POSITION H ncrement BE EF Decrement BE EF MENU Reset MENU Get POSITION V
31. 06 00 02 00 00 00 Increment 06 00 04 00 00 00 Decrement 06 00 05 00 00 00 continued on next page 24 g Pe u U VOLUME COMPONENT WO U 1 71 06 00 06 00 06 00 01 CC 02 00 06 00 67 CC 04 00 65 20 00 00 BE EF 03 06 00 05 00 00 00 06 00 75 CD 02 00 62 20 00 00 06 00 13 CD 04 00 62 20 00 00 06 00 C2 cc 05 00 62 20 0000 E E W TI VOLUME S VIDEO E E E E E E E u U Names Operation Type Leader Command Data CRC Type Setting code VOLUME OOo Get 06 00 31 CD 02 00 61 20 00 00 VIDEO i Increment 06 00 57 CD 04 00 61 20 00 00 Decrement 12 G 00 00 G v v v W Ty T1 Tmn 1 71 E E E E 00 00 E 00 00 E 00 00 VOLUME LAN W UJ T T e e 00 00 00 00 0000 00 00 00 00 E 00 00 TEE E D BE EF BE EF F BE EF a BE EF BE EF sa OFF BEEF 16 D3 MUTE EE D6 D2 75 D3 enen a FE D4 01 00 SPEAKER O e O e O e O e O WO TI E E E TYPEA Mm m minm TI WO TI E E E E E E E E E E E E W TI WO rn m m m Tl 11 TI E E EE G 06 00 6E D5 01 00 1C 20 00 00 G 03 06 00 5D D5 02 00 1C 20 00 00 AUDIO IN1 AUDIO t AUDIO IN2 B G G WO U U Mm m Tl T1 T1 TI 9E DC 02 00 0E DD 03 00 FE DD 00 00 CD DD 00 00 5E DD 01 00 AE DD 02 00 3E DC 03 00 OFF CE DC 00 00 Get FD DC 02 00 00 00 OFF BEE DA DF
32. 2 In the EASY MENU 1 Use the A cursor buttons to select an item to operate If you want to change it to the ADVANCED MENU select the ADVANCED MENU 2 Use the lt gt cursor buttons to operate the item In the ADVANCED MENU 1 Use the A V cursor buttons to select a menu If you want to change it to the EASY MENU select the EASY MENU The items in the menu appear on the right side 2 Press the cursor button or ENTER button to move the cursor to the right side Then use the A V cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the cursor button or ENTER button to progress The operation menu or dialog of the selected item will appear 3 Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item continued on next page 29 Using the menu function continued 3 To close the MENU press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press the lt cursor button or ENTER button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds e f you want to move the menu position use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION button e Some functions cannot be performed when a certain input port is selected or when a certain input signal is displayed e When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation Note that some items ex LANGUAGE VOLUME cannot be reset e In the ADVANCED MENU when you want to return
33. 446 e Even if the projector is in the standby mode the volume is adjustable when both of the following conditions are true An option other than X is selected for STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu 446 NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu 445 e In the standby mode the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME buttons on the remote control in synchronization with the volume of the projector 119 The volume of the microphone is adjusted regardless of the mode standby or normal Temporarily muting the sound MUTE button _ Press MUTE button on the remote control A dialog will appear on the screen indicating that you have muted the sound To restore the sound press the MUTE VOLUME or VOLUME button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds e When X is selected for current picture input port the sound is always muted Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu 446 e C C Closed Caption is automatically activated when sound is muted and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 480i 60 for COMPONENT COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu 53 Selecting an input signal 4 Press INPUT button on the projector Each time you press the button the
34. A V buttons and press the gt or ENTER button Alternatively point at RETURN in the dialog with the A V buttons and press the lt or ENTER button to return to the menu in step 1 25 PERFECT FIT my KEYSTONE _PERFECT FIT 2 When PERFECT FIT is pointed at pressing the gt or ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE_PERFECT FIT dialog 3 If it is necessary to initialize the current adjustment point at RESET in the dialog with the RESET button and press the ENTER or INPUT button 4 Select one of the corners or sides to be adjusted with the A W lt gt buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button 5 Adjust the selected part as below RETURN e For adjusting a corner use the A W lt b buttons to adjust the position of the corner e For adjusting the upper or lower side use the lt gt buttons to select any one point on the side and use the A buttons to adjust the distortion of the side e For adjusting the left or right side use the A V buttons to select any one point on the side and use the lt P gt buttons to adjust the distortion of the side e To adjust another corner or side press the ENTER or INPUT button and follow the procedure from step 4 NOTE Each corner and side can be adjusted individually but in some cases it may be adjusted in conjunction with another corner or side This is due to control restrictions and not a malfunction 6 To close the operation press the KEYSTONE button or point at EXI
35. ASPECT Selects the aspect setting OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE Performs the automatic adjustment INPUT PROGRESSIVE Selects the progressive setting VIDEO NR Selects the video noise reduction setting COLOR SPACE Selects the color space COMPONENT Selects the COMPONENT port setting S VIDEO FORMAT Selects the s video format setting C VIDEO FORMAT Selects the video format setting HDMI FORMAT Selects the HDMI format setting HDMI RANGE Selects the HDMI range setting COMPUTER IN1 Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type COMPUTER IN2 Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 function on off FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 function on off FRAME LOCK HDMI Turns the FRAME LOCK HDMI function on off 62 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description SETUP AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE KEYSTONE V Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting KEYSTONE H Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the Pern ett corners and sides AUTO ECO MODE Turns on off the automatic eco mode function
36. Devices or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not been provided by the manufacture etc Magnetic objects may cause interruption of the projector s internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling fans speed or stopping and may cause the projector to completely shut down OOO A O CAUTION Remove the power cord for complete separation e For safety purposes disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be used for prolonged periods of time ji E e Before cleaning turn off and unplug the projector Neglect could result in A fire or electrical shock power outlet Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every year Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction f Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods such as rainy season e Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous NOTE Do not give the remote control any physical impact A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control e Take care not to drop the remote control e Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control Take care of the lens e Close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being scratched when the projector is not used e Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display quali
37. Go to Advanced Menu and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 4 Use the A V cursor buttons to select the NETWORK and use the cursor button to enter the item 5 Use the A V cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION and use the gt cursor button to display the INFORMATION 6 The Passcode appears in the INFORMATION window NOTE Take the method 2 when you project your computer image by the LiveViewer or when the LAN port is not selected as input source e If no communication between the projector and computer in 5 minutes the Passcode will be changed 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 2 Entering the Passcode If you select Enter PassCode at item 1 5 the Please enter the PassCode screen is displayed Please enter the Passcode divided 4 digit each in 3 boxes total 12 digit Example PASSCODE 1234 5678 9ABC The Pascado ba 12t coo that can ba found on tho Starto Screen of the projector you ano curently trying to connect to Back Cormac Esil After entering the Passcode click the Connect to start the connection to the projector Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 If you click the Back the screen is back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method L14 NOTE When entering the Passcode capital and small letters are not distinguished e If you are using a Subnet mask other than Class A
38. IP address Last connected E 192 168 1 101 LOOT 2123 24 PM Pret hor at 150 De 1 10nt ISAD Soft Pl 2 Choose a profile data listed in the window Moea a C Condgure Motwork Settings Minua _ lt Back Cormect et 3 Click the Connect 4 The network connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 NOTE To check the setting in a profile data follow the process below 1 Choose a profile data that you want to check 2 Move the mouse cursor to the profile data and click the right button on the mouse to display a pop up menu 3 Select the Property in the pop up menu and click the left button on the MOUSE 4 The setting information of the selected profile data is shown e If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied If you like to use the Profile connection set the DHCP off in the projector 23 1 6 Manual configuration continued 1 6 2 History connection The LiveViewer can memory the network settings when connecting to the projector as a history record After that selecting a history record can quickly connect the network with the projector Select the manual ormai method you weeded Boy to cae Opoe o Proaig nan Dute crusted Profi 1 11 S020 Epai pri Protez 11 20 2009 3 10 41 Pe 1 Select the History
39. License Version 2 1 tablis par Free Software Foundation Inc Etats Unis ou autres accords de licence pour chaque logiciel Consultez la page Web suivante pour les accords de licence pour lesdits modules logiciels et d autres logiciels Adresse de la page Web hittp av hitachi com projector index html Adressez vous a votre revendeur pour toute question sur les logiciels sous licence Consultez les accords de licence de chaque logiciel aux pages suivantes 75 et les accords de licence de chaque logiciel sur la page Web pour le d tail des conditions de licence etc Etant donn que les accords de licence suivants sont tablis par un tiers autre que nous ils sont stipules en anglais Etant donn que le programme le module logiciel est accord sous licence gratuitement le programme est fourni sans aucune garantie explicite ou implicite dans la mesure permise par la loi Et nous n asSumons aucune responsabilit ni ne compensons pour la perte de toute sorte y compris mais sans s y limiter les pertes de donn es la perte de pr cision ou la perte de compatibilit avec une interface entre d autres programmes par le logiciel concern et ou l utilisation du logiciel concern dans la mesure permise par la lol FRAN CAIS Endbenutzerlizenzvereinbarung fur die Projektorsoftware Die Projektorsoftware besteht aus einer Vielzahl unabhangiger Softwaremodule und jedes dieser Softwaremodule unterliegt dem Urheberrecht von u
40. MODE MIRROR RESET FILTER TIME LANGUAGE ADVANCED MENU EXIT PICTURE menu BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA COLOR TEMP Co or TINT SHARPNESS ACTIVE IRIS My MEMORY IMAGE menu ASPECT OVER SCAN V POSITION H POSITION H PHASE H size AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE INPUT menu PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE COMPONENT VIDEO FORMAT HDMI FORMAT HDMI RANGE COMPUTER IN FRAME LOCK RESOLUTION 2 SETUP menu 2000 nn uae 43 AUTO KEYSTONE D KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE Eco mobe MIRROR STANDBY MODE MONITOR OUT AUDIO menu 82 000 nwo 46 VOLUME SPEAKER AUDIO SOURCE Hpmi AuDIO Mic LeveL Mic VOLUME SCREEN menu 2000008 48 LANGUAGE MENU POSITION BLANK START UP MyScreen MyScreen Lock MESSAGE SOURCE NAME TEMPLATE C C OPTION menu AUTO SEARCH AUTO KEYSTONE DIRECT POWER ON AUTO POWER OFF USB TYPE B LAMP TIME FILTER TIME My BUTTON My source SERVICE NETWORK menu SETUP PROJECTOR NAME My IMAGE AMX D D PRESENTATION INFORMATION SERVICE SECURITY menu SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE MyYSCREEN PASSWORD PIN LOCK TRANSITION DETECTOR My TEXT PASSWORD My TEXT DISPLAY My TEXT WRITING SECURITY INDICATOR STACK LOCK Presentation tools PC LESS Presentation Thumbnail Mode Full Screen Mode Slideshow mode Playlist USB Display 86 Right Click menu Floating menu Options window Maintenance 2020000 89 Replacing the lamp 89 Cleaning and replacing the ai
41. Ms 1280x768 1 7 25 160 08 3 23 768 1 W XGA 60Hz 1280 x 800 morsen 18 24 rsa os e aon 1 ais 1280 x 960 maroo vo zo no oo o wo 1 ae 1600x1200 1 2 19 99 04 3 46 1200 1 UXGA 60Hz Signal mode Connection Co axe ponts USB TYPEA DC5V 0 5A HDMI USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 GIY B Cb Pb R Cr Pr AUDIO IN3 AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN1 REMOTE CONTROL A COMPUTER IN1 MONITOR OUT D sub 15pin mini shrink jack lt Computer signal gt e Video signal RGB separate Analog 0 7Vp p 75Q terminated positive e H V sync signal TTL level positive negative e Composite sync signal TTL level lt Component video signal gt e Video signal Y Analog 1 0 0 1Vp p with composite sync 75Q terminated Cb Pb Analog 0 740 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cr Pr Analog 0 7 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated e System 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 720p 50 60 1080i 50 60 Pin Signal Pin Signal 3 Video Blue CbiP gt 11 Noconnestion 4 Noconnection gt SDA DDC data No connection s Ground No connection 6 Ground Red Ground Cr Pr_ 13 H sync Composite sync No connection _ 8 Ground Blue Ground Cb Pb 45 SCL DDC clock connection No connection bee TYPEA C5V 0 5A HDMI USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 GIY B Cb Pb R Cr Pr
42. NO then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 2 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 14 If you put a check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again To display this dialog again click Option amp icon in the LiveViewer main menu and remove the check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings If you want to change the Network configuration to add click the Change A pe dialog for changing the Network configuration Rbretmek as shown to the right will be displayed Enter IP address and subnet mask then click the OK Procedure to connect to the projector will start Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 If you click the Cancel you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration ee ee ee 28 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued If the entered IP address and projector s IP Silas aus ig Gath Gis bs RR ew cece a address are the same a warning dialog shown Psa Gracia an E Matas Wea cere od ss to the right will be displayed Click the OK and then enter a different IP address from the projector s one in the dialog for changing Network configuration If the con
43. PASSWORD box 0000 will be displayed for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box e Please do not forget your password continued on next page 71 ltem scription O O O O The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the gt button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the MyScreen E MyScreen PASSWORD PASSWORD on off menu to select ON ENTER NEW PASSWORD The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small i will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the A W lt gt buttons to enter the box small password Move the cursor to the right side Sa erasures of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small Pereu and press the button to display the NEW oo000 PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same PASSWORD again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the MyScreen projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu
44. PC Less Presentation Moda Tf you continue you will cancel the ourent Sideshow Presentation e Click the Yes then the projector will stop the Slideshow and switch the input source to the LAN port e Click the No then the projector is Eee remained in the Slideshow mode and the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode on your computer E Are you sure you want to change the input channel of the Projector to LAN The projector is not set to the LAN as an And yOU Sune YOU want fo chande the input channel of the Projector to input signal Lan e Click the Yes then the projector is switched to the LAN e Click the No then the projector is remained as it is and the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode on your computer 31 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination continued 1 8 2 Connection error When the connection to the projector could not be established an error message Network Connection not established will come up Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 32 on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 14 NOTE If My Connection is selected and the connection could not be established the LiveViewer main menu will not be displayed Check the network setting in the projector and retry the connection from item 1
45. Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 1 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE 422 Troubleshooting E A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration changes A pihia foninnchion could nat ba mttablched Windows prevented network configuration changes Please meure that you ate authorized to make these changes oF cek your uiy Mtr You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 24 on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 114 Consult to the network administrator Log in the Windows under Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer 9 27 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued E f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector This dialog will be displayed when you Do yOu want bo Sophy suggested natwok settings as foe need to add a Network configuration on Rockies 01900604106 your computer to connect to the projector Saratmak 250 Arae Confirm with your network administrator if I Not deakarha confirmation dog for adn Motwork settings the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK and then click the Yes Click the
46. Reset ACTIVE IRIS OFF Set THEATER PRESENTATION MY MEMORY S Load MY MEMORY Set Save 16 9 16 10 ASPECT 14 9 NATIVE NORMAL Get Get e e OVER SCAN Increment Decrement OVER SCAN Execute Reset Get V POSITION Increment Decrement V POSITION Execute Reset only for CP WX4021N U U W W U m m m m TI TI 7 et et TINT Increment Decrement et m m Tl Tl Tl 1 p im m TT Ogo W TI E W TI E E W U T T E E WO TI W TI E E E E W U m m T 71 E E E E E E E E E E W TI m m T T T W TI E E E E E E W TI Names Operation Type Leader Command Data i a CRC Type Setting code Get 06 00 F1 82 02 00 01 21 00 00 H POSITION Increment Decrement W U 1 71 E E W TI W m m T U TI E E W TI E E U U 1 71 E E E E E E E E E E E U TI v v W wiv W W W mm m m mm m m TI T T TT ep O 7 ep a vivu ninin COLOR SPACE U U T T E E et BEEF E E E ep U U 1 1 E WW U U Ty my 71 E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E WO TI 00 00 00 00 Reset Get Increment 00 00 Decrement 00 00 Get 00 00 Increment 00 00 Decrement 00 00 OFF E EF TV E EF FILM BE EF Get E EF E E AUTO RG E 01 00 t SMPTE240 REC709 01 00 03 00 REC601 04 00 02 00 00 00 COMPONENT 00 00 COMPONENT SCAR
47. TYPE is set to NETWORK BRIDGE the CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands 6 3 Communication port For the NETWORK BRIDGE function send the data from the computer to the projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the Port Settings of web browser 150 NOTE Except for 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number It is set to 9717 as the default setting 19 6 4 Transmission method The transmission method can be selected from the menus only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide HALF DUPLEX e FULL DUPLEX 6 4 1 HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer while waiting for response data from an external device After the projector receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is past the projector can receive the data from the computer That means that the projector controls transmitting and receiving the data to synchronize the communication To use the HALF DUPLEX method set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following the instructions below TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data Ethern
48. To display the transferred image select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK menu For more information please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of the NETWORK menu NETWORK menu in User s Manual Operating Guide NOTE It is possible to allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum e Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image LQOPTION menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide e The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling 1187 in detail e If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display function the application for the USB Display will be closed To restart the application exit the MY IMAGE function and then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe will run again GQUSB Display in the User s Manual Operating Guide 70 4 My Image Function Continued Configure the following items from a web browser when MY IMAGE function is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK T a 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open the My Image Port Port 9716 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required othe
49. a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library uncombined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 20 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically recei
50. after wringing well Then wipe lightly with a soft dry cloth AWARNING P gt Before caring make sure the power cord is not plugged in and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and or malfunction to the projector gt Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally Doing is so dangerous gt Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector It could result in a fire an electric shock and or malfunction to the projector e Do not put anything containing water cleaners or chemicals near the projector e Do not use aerosols or sprays ACAUTION P Please take right care of the projector according to the following Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc gt Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual gt Do not polish or wipe with hard objects NOTICE gt Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands 94 MIKO OKEXS Korey tinxe lf an abnormal operation should occur stop using the projector immediately Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector the following checks and measures are recommended before requesting repair If this does not resolve the problem please contact your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Related messages When some message appe
51. allows you to adjust the vertical and SS aches FIT horizontal keystone PERFECT FIT allows you to adjust each of the screen corners and sides to correct the distortion First press the KEYSTONE button to display the KEYSTONE menu and point at one of items with the A V buttons Then follow the procedure shown below for the item you selected EXIT NOTE The menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds of inactivity Pressing the KEYSTONE button again finishes the operation and closes the menu or dialog e When the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT neither AUTO nor MANUAL is selectable If you wish to use these functions refer to step 3 in the PERFECT FIT item to initialize the adjustment of PERFECT FIT e When TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON these functions are not available E0174 2 When AUTO is pointed at pressing the or ENTER button performs automatic vertical keystone correction To close the operation press the KEYSTONE button or pointed at the EXIT in the dialog with A V buttons and press the or ENTER button MANUAL S2 KEYSTONE_MANUAL 2 When MANUAL is pointed at pressing the gt or lt RETURN ENTER button displays the KYSTONE_MANUAL dialog 2 Select the vertical or horizontal keystone 0 amp with the A V buttons 4 Use the lt gt buttons to adjust the keystone distortion To close the operation press the KEYSTONE button or pointed at the EXIT in the dialog with
52. amp SCART RGB COMPONENT when the SCART RGB is selected the COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port A SCART adapter or SCART cable is required fora SCART RGB input to the projector For details contact your dealer continued on next page 39 ttem escription The video format for S VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set 1 Use the A V buttons to select the input port AUTO NTSC PAL SECAM ne MePAL M PAL 2 Using the lt gt buttons smo o o o o o o switches the mode for video peec e e Ris E format VIDEO FORMAT AUTO NTSC amp PAL SECAM N PAL amp M PAL amp NTSC4 43 lt t e This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port or the S VIDEO port e The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode e The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals If the picture becomes unstable e g an irregular picture lack of color please select the mode according to the input signal Using the A V cursor buttons switches the video format for an input from the HDMI port AUTO VIDEO COMPUTER Ce ee Feature HDMI FORMAT AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals e When the COMPUTER is selected the functions COLOR PICTURE menu TINT PICTURE menu and OVER SCAN IMAGE menu are unavailable Using the A V cursor
53. application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 8 If the distribution and or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 9 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of this License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 10
54. authentication do not set any password in Web Browser Control e For specifications of PULink see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association URL http pjlink jomia or jp 32 End User License Agreement for the Projector Software Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules The projector also uses software modules that we have developed or and produced And there exist our copyright and intellectual property for each of such software and related items including but not limited to the software related documents These rights above are protected by copyright law and other applicable laws And the projector uses software modules licensed as Freeware upon GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 and GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 established by Free Software Foundation Inc U S or license agreements for each software Refer following web page for license agreements for such software modules and other software web page address http av hitachi com projector index html Contact dealer in your region for inquiry regarding licensed software Refer to license agreement of each software in following pages 75 and license agreements of each software on the web page for detail of the license conditions and so on The original in English
55. because today due to bad weather lt Messenger function requires an exclusive application for your computer To edit transfer and display the text data use the application You can download it from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Refer to the manual for the application for the details of Messenger function and instructions of the application NOTE It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum e Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying messenger text on off EQOPTION menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide e The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling 181 for the detail 72 5 Messenger Function Continued Configure the following items from a web browser when Messenger function is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then EE lt click the OK eX a 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open the Messenger Port Port 9719 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings
56. but also domain SMTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the sender e mail address Sender E mail address The length of the sender e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Configures the e mail address of up to five recipients You can also specify the TO or CC for each address The length of the recipient e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Recipient E mail address Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the Send Test Mail button Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the Send Test Mail e If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses 52 3 6 Alert Settings Displays and configures failure amp alert settings Item Description Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Fan Error The cooling fan is not operating The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Air Flow Error The internal temperature is rising Lamp Error Temp Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become SOIE overcooled Filter Error Filter time over Oth
57. can be up to 100 alphanumeric mamounject characters Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configures the text of the e mail to be sent The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric Mail Text characters but if you are using some of special characters below the length may be shorter Special characters amp and space Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Alarm Time Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The trigger of Filter Error e mail is depending on the FILTER MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen An e mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is set No notification e mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF LQOPTION menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide e Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the lamp timer When the lamp hour exceeds this threshold that is configured through the Web page the e mail will be sent out e Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the filter time When the filter hour exceeds this threshold that is configured in the Web page the e mail will be sent out 54 3 Schedule Settings Displays and configures schedule settings Item Description Daily Configures the daily
58. character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous MY TEXT without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button e The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to OFF Selecting this item displays the SECURITY INDICATOR dialog Use the A V buttons to select ON or OFF ON amp OFF When ON is selected while PINLOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON the SECURITY indicator blinks in the standby state L173 74 SECURITY INDICATOR Selecting this item displays the STACK LOCK dialog For more information about this menu check our web site User s manual concise STACK LOCK RESSAMIN OAS The projector has the following two convenient tools that enable on screen presentations easily and quickly PC LESS Presentation below USB Display 86 PC LESS Presentation The PC LESS Presentation reads image data from storage media inserted into the USB TYPE A port and displays the image on the following modes The PC LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A port as the input source This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer Thumbnail mod
59. continued computer becomes valid when the display mode is changed to Single PC mode Also the Presenter mode setting becomes invalid when the display mode is changed to Multi PC mode regardless the setting on the computers For details see the section Presenter mode in the User s Manual Network Guide MULTI PC MODE continued Selecting this item displays the user name This function helps you identify from which computer the DISPLAY n image is sent USER NAME You can set user names for each computer on LiveViwer For details see the section Display User Name in the User s Manual Network Guide continued on next page 69 ltem escription O O O O Selecting this item displays the NETWORK_INFORMATION dialog for confirming the network settings NETWORK _ INFORMATION PASSCODE 0000 0000 0000 PROJECTOR NAME Projector_Name IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 254 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT GATEWAY 00 0 0 DHS SERVER 0 U U O MAC ADDRESS FF FF FF FF FF FF TIME DIFFERENCE GMT 00 00 DATE AND TIME 2000 17 71 O 00 RETURN PLEXIT INFORMATION e For the details of PASSCODE see the section Selecting the network connection method in the User s manual Network Guide e Only the first 16 characters of the projector name are displayed e When the voltage level of the battery for the built in clock decreases the set time may become incorrect even though accurate date and time are in
60. copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original
61. copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of perfo
62. e Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters e Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls e Do not place the projector on carpet cushions or bedding e Do not stop up block nor cover the projector s vent holes Do not place anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector s intake vents e Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction gt Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place Placing the projector in such places could cause a fire an electric shock and malfunction of the projector e Do not place the projector near humidifiers Especially for an ultrasonic humidifier chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems e Do not place the projector in a smoking area kitchen passageway or by the window NOTICE Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor e Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused e Keep heat sensitive things away from the projector Otherwise they may be damaged by the heat from the projector Connecting with your devices Before connecting the projector to a device consult the manual of the device t
63. et TEMPLATE On S SE 2 m m Tl T1 TI Get Off e OFF ON C C DISPLAY AUTO Get CAPTIONS C C MODE TEXT Get Ww Ww oe i m B ep D WO n E E W U 1 71 E E WO TI C C Set CHANNEL v v U 1 m1 Get OFF AUTO SEARCH O Get O O Get O WO TI E E E ep D i U TI E E E E W TI F ep T i W W T T AUTO KEYSTONE W TI E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E F EE E DIRECT POWER ON Get AUTO POWER n Increment OFF Decrement MOUSE USB TYPE B USB DISPLAY Get LAMP TIME Get O zZ ep D i U TI ep D oe T T E es WO continued on next page 28 Command Data Data Nam ration T Header Operation Type CRC Action Type Setting code EEF 03 06 00 00 00 BE 04 00 EE 0B 00 EE 06 00 EE OC 00 EE 03 00 EE 01 00 00 36 05 00 EE 02 00 EE o1 00 00 36 01 00 EE 22 00 EE o1 00 0036 1600 My BuTTON 1 S MESSENGER BE E 25 00 INFORMATION BE E AUTO KEYSTONE V BE EF EEF EEF EEF FILTER RESET BE EF EE EE EE 0100 EE 00 36 3600 EE 01 00 0036 3700 00 00 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 a EE 04 00 EE 0B 00 EE 06 00 EE 0C 00 EE 03 00 EE 05 00 EE 02 00 EE 01 00 2200 EE My BUTTON 2 S2 MESSENGER BE EF INFORMATION BE EF EEF U TI En U TI u U m Tmn Tm Tm 71 7 TH TH TIT TmT Tm Tm Tm TY T 1 vvv vv V v TY TH TH Tm Tm TY TM 7
64. is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable 1 The setting on the access point 7 Enter the following information SSID WirelessAccessPoint example Encryption WEP64bit example Encryption key 2 example 2 The setting on the projector 3 ANCL ee i Subset muck enter the Subnet mask that the projoctor amp uara Enter the following information o Subnet mask 4 255 255 255 128 example 3 Click the Connect 4 The wireless connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 30 1 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point 2 If you use an encryption you need to set it Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector The encryption key is always shown as rrrrrrixx 3 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE 422 4 If you use Subnet mask except Class A B C please set it 21 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Wired LAN 1 Enter the following information for the projector Subnet mask 7 255 255 255 128 example 2 Click the Connect 3 The network connection will be established Pinasa enter the projactor suet misk Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the E Dee ee connection to your destination 130 1 If you use a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C this screen appea
65. it is nota malfunction Temporarily blanking the screen BLANK button 4 Press BLANK button on the remote control The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of the screen of input signal Please refer to BLANK item in SCREEN menu 0148 To exit from the BLANK screen and return to the input signal screen press BLANK button again e The projector automatically exits from the BLANK mode when some control buttons are pressed NOTE The sound is not connected with the BLANK screen function If necessary set the volume or mute first To display the BLANK screen and mute the sound at one time use AV MUTE function L19 28 Using the menu function This projector has the following menus PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY and EASY MENU EASY MENU consists of functions often used and the other menus are classified into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU Each of these menus is operated using the same methods While the projector is displaying any menu the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor buttons The basic operations of these menus are as follows POSITION ana oy MENU button Cursor buttons Cursor ENTER button ESC button x Op RESET button t Hi q To start the MENU press the MENU button The MENU you last used EASY or ADVANCED will appear EASY MENU has priority to appear just after powered on
66. just after use since it is too hot gt Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this projector because it could damage the lens such as melting the lens continued on next page Part names continued Control panel and Lens adjusters Lens adjuster door FOCUS ring 23 ZOOM ring 2123 HORIZONTAL horizontal adjuster L423 VERTICAL vertical adjuster L423 LOCK horizontal lens position lock 123 STANDBYION button 118 INPUT button 179 MENU button 2129 0 1 2 3 4 SECURITY indicator 176 LAMP indicator 2197 TEMP indicator 2197 7 8 9 12 13 POWER indicator 2197 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 14 Cap storage pockets 1 Rear panel 10 14 1 LAN port 11 COMPUTER IN2 ports 415 2 USB TYPE A port G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr H V 3 HDMI port 12 REMOTE CONTROL port 4 USB TYPE B port 13 MONITOR OUT port 5 MIC port E14 14 CONTROL port 6 AUDIO IN1 port 15 COMPONENT ports Y Cb Pb Cr Pr 7 AUDIO IN2 port 16 VIDEO port 8 AUDIO IN3 R L ports 17 S VIDEO ports 9 AUDIO OUT R L ports 18 Shutdown switch 2198 10 COMPUTER IN1 port 19 Security slot L15 4 3 GSETPE Va 10 2 C5V 0 5A HDMI USB TYPE B COMPUTER IN1 GIY B Cb Pb R Cr Pr 1 rm
67. may not work correctly In such a case please SERVICE choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment and make adjustment manually GHOST 1 Select a color element of ghost using the lt P gt buttons 2 Adjust the selected element using the A V buttons to disappear ghost FILTER MESSAGE Use the A V button to set the timer for notifying by the message when to replace the filter unit 100h 200h 500h 1000h 2000h 5000h OFF After choosing an item except OFF the message REMINDER HRS PASSED will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by this feature 4196 When the OFF is chosen the message will not appear Utilize this feature to keep the air filter clean setting the suitable time according to your environment of this projector e Please take care of the filter unit periodically even if there is no message If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or other matter the internal temperature will rise which could cause malfunction or reduce the lifetime of the projector e Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector and the condition of the filter unit continued on next page 59 ltem escription O O O O O KEY LOCK 1 Use the A buttons to choose the operations control CONTROL PANEL amp REMOTE CONTROL 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select ON or OFF Peaasi ON amp OFF Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY ON
68. number 7 8 lt SET gt 01h 00h lt GET gt 02h 00h lt INCREMENT gt 04h 00h lt DECREMENT gt 05h 00h lt EXECUTE gt 06h 00h Refer to the Communication command table above Type Setting code For byte number 9 12 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 417 lt SET gt Change setting to desired a cH aL aH 01h 00h bL bH cL cH by eL eH lt GET gt Read projector internal setup value bL aL aH 02h 00h bL bH 00h 00h bH lt INCREMENT gt Increment setup value BEN EFh 06h OOM Ial aH 04h 00h bL bH 00h ooh bL bH by 1 3 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal 1 ACK reply 06h When the projector receives the Set Increment Decrement or Execute command correctly the projector changes the setting data for the specified item by Type and it returns the code 2 NAK reply 15h When the projector cannot understand the received command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and the setting status of the projector 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh When the projector receives the GET command correctly the projector returns the responce code and 2 by
69. of the input signal and projector panel are identical e Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals e The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite sync or a sync on G Malte Sete Sie yaKels The following signals are used for the initial settings The signal timing of some computer models may be different In such case adjust the items V POSITION and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu Back porch B Front porch D Back porch b Front porch d Active video C i Active video c i Data Data H ef V sne MNT Sync A Sync a Resolution Horizontal signal timing us Vertical signal timing lines B C D a b H x V a 720 x 400 2 0 3 0 1 0 3 42 1 TEXT 640x480 3 8 1 9 254 06 2 33 480 10 VGA 60Hz 640x480 1 3 4 1 20 3 0 8 3 28 480 9 VGA 72Hz _ VGA 85Hz 800x600 2 0 3 6 22 2 07 2 22 600 1 SVGA 56Hz 800x600 3 2 2 2 20 0 14 0 4 23 600 1 SVGA 60Hz 800x600 2 4 1 3 16 0 1 1 6 23 600 37 SVGA 72Hz 800x600 1 6 3 2 16 2 0 3 3 21 600 1 SVGA 75Hz 800x600 1 1 2 7 14 2 0 6 3 27 600 1 SVGA 85Hz 832x624 1 1 3 9 14 5 06 3 39 624 1 Mac16 mode 1024x768 2 1 2 5 15 8 0 4 6 29 768 3 XGA 60Hz 1024x768 1 8 1 9 137 0 3 6 29 768 3 XGA 70HZ 1152 x 864 marose 12 2a orfos gt ee
70. on the operations control selected in Step 1 Selecting OFF releases the locked buttons on the operations control selected in Step 1 e Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental operation This function does not have any effect on the remote control REMOTE FREQ 1 Use the A button to change the Pieler Ors Enel sensor frequency setting 44 17 som 1 NORMAL 2 HIGH 2 Use the lt gt button to change the projector s remote sensor on or off ON amp OFF The factory default setting is for both 1 NORMAL and 2 HIGH to be SERVICE on If the remote control does not function correctly disable either of them It s not possible to disable both options at the same time Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION menu In this menu you can configure the serial communication settings of the projector using the CONTROL port SS OPTION _ SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION continued SERIAL SETTINGS TRANSMISSION METHOD HALF DUPLEX RESPONSE LIMIT TIME OFF STACK 4 RETURN COMMUNICATION Select an item using the cursor buttons A V Then pressing the button opens the submenu for the setting item you selected Or pressing the lt button instead of the gt button makes the menu back to the previous one without changing the setup Each submenu can be operated as described above e When COMMUNICATION TYPE E467 is set to OFF the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid e For the function of
71. one computer 43 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation continued 2 Multi PC mode The projector screen is divided to 4 zones The projector displays images in one zone sent by a computer so that the projector can display images sent by up to 4 computers at the same time 2 2 2 Presenter mode In the Single PC mode the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer if the Presenter mode is selected in the LiveViewer While making your presentation you don t need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer The Presenter mode can be set on the Option menu in the LiveViewer main menu 41 2 2 3 Display User Name A User Name can be input in the LiveViewer which is displayed on screen by operating the menu on the projector So it can be found out whose image is currently displayed on screen L41 44 3 Web Cxoyal iro You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same network NOTE Internet Explorer 6 0 or later is required e If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration you must enable JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly See the Help files for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript e It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed 45 3 1 Lo
72. or dusty place ex a smoking space a kitchen a beach etc Do not place the projector outdoors e Do not use a humidifier near the projector Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate The air filter should be cleaned periodically If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction The projector may display the message such as CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising e When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter clean the air filter as soon as possible e If the soiling will not come off the air filter or it becomes damaged replace the air filter e Use the air filter of the specified type only Please order the air filter specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer e When you replace the lamp replace also the air filter The air filter may be attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector e Do not turn on the projector without air filter Avoid a high temperature environment The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and other parts Do not place the projector the remote control and other parts in direct sunlight or near a hot object such as heater etc Avoid Magnetism Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not shielded or protected on or near the projector itself ie Magnetic Security
73. packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens e The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction Preparations Loading batteries into the remote control Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place 1 Holding the hook part of the battery cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two AA batteries HITACHI MAXELL Part No LR6 or R6P according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place AWARNING P Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment e When replacing the batteries replace both of the batteries with new batteries of the same type Do not use a new battery with a used battery e Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not use batteries of different types at the same time Do not mix a new battery with used one e Make sure the p
74. picture please see User s Manual Operating Guide Turning off the power 1 Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control The message Power off will appear STANDBYION button on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Press the STANDBY ON button again while the message appears The projector lamp will go off and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete 3 Attach the lens cover after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp POWER indicator AAWARNING P Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use since it is too hot gt Remove the power cord for complete separation The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible NOTE Please power off the projector after any connected devices are powered off e This projector has the AUTO OFF function that can make the projector turn off automatically For more information please see User s Manual Operating Guide 11 Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time co
75. product disposal contact your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate Disconnect the room well and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the the plug from Projector vents or get it in your eyes or mouth outei e Before replacing the lamp make sure the power switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp e Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is S dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken e Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damag
76. projector switches its input port from the current port as below gt COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN wv JO VIDEO USB TYPEA S VIDEO USB TYPE B 7 COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr HDMI e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu 1154 the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected e t may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port continued on next page INPUT button 19 Selecting an input signal continued 1 e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION Press COMPUTER button on the remote control COMPUTER button Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port from the current port as below COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN USB TYPEB lt USBTYPEA menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected M54 If COMPUTER button is pressed when VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT or HDMI port is selected the projector will check COMPUTER IN1 port first e t may take several seconds to project the images from the 1 e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION 1 e This function also can use for document camera Select the 20 USB TYPE B port Press VIDEO button on the remote control VIDEO button Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port from the current port as below HDMI gt CO
77. reset the filter timer After the remedy reset the power to ON There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled Please use the unit within the usage temperature parameters 5 C to 35 C After the treatment reset the power to ON Lighting Alternative In Green blinking in Red Blinking In At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the Green for Turned Turned projector approx 3 off off Please refer to Schedule Settings section of User s seconds Manual Network Guide NOTE When the interior portion has become overheated for safety purposes the projector is automatically shut down and the indicator lamps may also be turned off In such a case disconnect the power cord and wait at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again Shutting the projector down Only when the projector can not be turned off by usual procedure 118 please push the shutdown switch using a pin or similar and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet Before turning it on again wait at least 10 minutes to make the projector cool down enough Resetting all settings When it is hard to correct some wrong settings the FACTORY RESET function of SERVICE item in OPTION menu 4163 can reset all settings except settings such as LANGUAGE LAMP TIME FILTER TIME FILTER MESSAGE SECURIT
78. schedule Monday Configures the Monday schedule Tuesday Configures the Tuesday schedule Wednesday Configures the Wednesday schedule Thursday Configures the Thursday schedule Friday Configures the Friday schedule Saturday Configures the Saturday schedule Specific date No 1 Configures the specific date No 1 schedule Specific date No 2 Configures the specific date No 2 schedule Specific date No 3 Configures the specific date No 3 schedule Specific date No 4 Configures the specific date No 4 schedule Specific date No 5 Configures the specific date No 5 schedule 55 3 7 Schedule Settings Continued The schedule settings are shown below Item Description Schedule Click the Enable check box to enable the schedule Configures the month and date Date Month Day This item appears only when Specific date No 1 5 is selected Click the Apply button to save the settings The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list To add additional functions and events set the following items Item Description Time Configures the time to execute commands Command Parameter Configures the commands to be executed Power Configures the parameters for power control Input Source Configures the parameters for input switching My Image Configures the parameters for My Image data display L70 Messenger Configures the parameters for Messenger da
79. shown in the menu Fin Select what you like to use in the list and click the Next Then proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 114 NOTE if you select the wireless LAN the wireless LAN adapters in your computer are shown in the list e If the wired LAN is selected the wired LAN adapters in your computer are shown Troubleshooting E Are you sure that you want to turn on the network adapter The screen is displayed in the case that the selected network adapter is invalid Ar yous sra that you want ta tum on the atwo adaptar e To turn it on click the Yes and then proceed to item 1 5 14 e Not to turn it on click the No and then the screen is back to the previous one to select another network adapter If no more adapter in your computer the LiveViewer will be closed cC j h 10 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued E A network connection was not established The screen is displayed in the case that the projector is not connected with a LAN cable to your computer when the wired LAN is selected Be sure that the projector is connected with a LAN cable to your computer Click the OK then the screen is back to the previous one to select the network connection mode E Windows firewall is enabled On The screen is displayed in the case that aines final k arabad On the firewall setting is activated and the Ae you sure you
80. space 30 MB or higher e USB Port e USB cable 1 piece Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable the projector will be recognized as a CD ROM drive on your computer Then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe will run automatically and the application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be ready on your computer for the USB Display The application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be automatically closed when the USB cable is unplugged NOTE If the software does not start automatically this is typically because CD ROM autorun is disabled on your OS follow the instructions below 1 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 2 Enter F LiveViewerLiteUSB exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive F on your computer you will need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive e CD ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running e The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password protected screen saver is running To resume the transmission exit the screen saver e Check our web site for the latest version of the software and its manual User s Manual concise Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating This application will appear in the Windows notifica
81. the following procedure 1 Selecting this item displays a dialog titled MyScreen It will ask you if you start capturing an image from the current screen Please wait for the target image to be displayed and press the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear To stop performing press the RESET button on the remote control 2 Using the A lt gt buttons adjusts the frame position Please move the frame to the position of the image which you want to use The frame may not be able to be moved for some input signals To start registration press the ENTER ooo or INPUT button on the remote control To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog press the RESET button on the remote control Registration takes several minutes When the registration is completed the registered screen and the following message is displayed for several seconds MyScreen registration is finished If the registration failed the following message is displayed A capturing error has occurred Please try again e This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen Lock item 450 e This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu 72 e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port continued on next page 49 ltem escri
82. the computer is valid e The Presenter Mode is set valid in factory default setting e In addition to using the software menu on the computer on which Presenter Mode is turned on you can cancel this function by using the projector s OSD menu QUIT PRESENTER MODE EXECUTE of the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu Display User Name A User Name that is up to 20 letters can be input by using alphanumeric characters The user name can be displayed on the projector screen so you can find out whose image is currently on the screen Refer to LANETWORK menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide If the check box is not marked the information is not sent to the projector 42 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation This chapter explains the Network Presentation feature with which you can project computer images transmitted through a network The LiveViewer allows you to project images from one or multiple computers by connecting the projector to an existing network without using computer cables This Network Presentation feature helps you to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences To start the Network Presentation select the LAN port as the input source on the projector and click the Starting Capture button on the LiveViewer 2 2 1 Display mode Two display modes Single PC mode and Multi PC mode are available for the Network Presentation 1 Single PC mode The projector displays images sent by
83. the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself Disconnect If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does the plug ventilate the room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine irom the particles that come out from the projector s vent holes and not to get Paet them into your eyes or mouth e Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power cord then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp e Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws e Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from a ceiling This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken e Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury e Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not mee
84. used to control compilation and installation of the library Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you cha
85. vivi vv v mm mm TI T T W m m TI E E W TI FRAME LOCK S HDMI AUTO KEYSTONE V Execute EXECUTE E EE Get EE Hi m m Tl Tl WW T m KEYSTONE H WO m m Tl Tl t PERFECT FIT BE EF 06 00 6E 89 01 00 20 21 00 00 W m m TI 06 00 S BE EF 03 o6 00 To EE TEN E Right Top H Decrement BE E et BE E Right Top V Merement BEE BE E 06 00 continued on next page 22 et et et et 1 Names Operation Type Leader Command Data i a CRC Type Setting code PERFECT EIT BE EF 03 25 21 00 00 ber O BE EF 00 00 BE EF 00 00 PERFECTEIT 00 00 Left Bottom V BE EF 00 00 G G et et BE EF 00 00 EET BE EF 00 00 u BE EF 00 00 i BE EF 00 00 E BE EF 00 00 a aaa BE EF 00_00 BE EF 00_00 t k zu Execute BE EF 06 00 D5 8A o6 00 29 21 00 00 PERFECT FIT BE EF 31 97 41 21 00 00 Left Side Increment BE EF 00 00 Distortion Decrement BE EF 41 21 00 00 BE EF 00 00 Right Side Increment BE EF 00 00 Distortion Decrement BE EF 00 00 BE EF Distortion Increment Position V PERFECT FIT Top Side Distortion PERFECT FIT Bottom Side Distortion 03 PERFECT FIT Distortion Increment 00 00 Position H Decrement 00 00 All Sides Reset moe ee OFF 00 00 Ope ON 01 00 01 00 Get 00 00 set NORMAL 01 00 00 00 ECO MODE ECO 01 00 Get 02 00 00 00 E E E E E NORMAL 00 00 H INVERT 01 00 01 30 01 00 Set MIRROR E E E E E E E W U oOjJojo O
86. 0 00 BE E 00 00 COLOR TEMP COLOR TEMP BE E 06 00 04 F5 02 00 B5 30 00 00 OFFSET R BE E 06 00 62 F5 04 00 B5 30 00 00 E E 06 00 B3 F4 05 00 B5 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP OFFSET R Execute BE EF 03 06 00 40 C5 06 00 4A 70 00 00 Reset COLOR TEMP OFFSET G COLOR TEMP OFFSET G Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BC C4 06 00 4B 70 00 00 Reset continued on next page 19 ee WW 0 W mm mm T T TH TY THY THY TmT mmnm THY THY TY TY T Names Operation Type Leader Command Data i a CRC Action Setting code COLOR TEMP BE E 06 00 BC F4 02 00 B7 30 00 00 OFFSET B BE E 06 00 DA F4 04 00 B7 30 00 00 BE 0B F5 05 00 B7 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP E OFFSET B Execute BE EF 06 00 C8 C5 E O ws 7 Increment Decrement 06 00 4C 70 00 00 Reset G 06 00 B5 72 02 00 02 22 00 00 COLOR Increment E 06 00 D3 72 04 00 02 22 00 00 Decrement G W m m TI a E EF 02 73 BE EF BE EF E E E E 04 00 E EF 05 00 06 00 C4 DO 06 00 09 70 00 00 E EF 01 00 00 00 EE 01 00 04 33 10 00 E EF 01 00 11 00 E E 02 00 E EF E EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 02 D6 01 00 08 20 01 00 01 00 OA 00 09 00 01 00 08 00 10 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 E F7 70 00 00 EE 00 00 06 00 EC D9 06 00 27 70 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 BE EF 06 00 EO D2 06 00 02 70 00 00 continued on next page 20 TINT Reset Execute G SHARPNESS Increment Decrement SHARPNESS Execute
87. 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 NOTE If the DHCP is set on in the projector the network connection between the projector and computer may not be established since IP address may be varied If you like to use the My Connection set the DHCP off in the projector e If no profile data is assigned to the My Connection it can t be used Troubleshooting E A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration A pihaa connection could net ba octablechod Please meure that you ate authorized to make these changes oF nck your Liy Mays You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK to return to the screen to select the network connection mode 410 Consult to the network administrator and log in again under the Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer 09 12 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued E Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Ar FOL Sune you want to Oorineot the aiartod projector e To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 4130 e Not to connect click the No to return to the screen to select the network connection mode L410 13 1 5 Selecting
88. 21N 1280 x 800 When a resolution larger than the specified resolution is selected the projector will convert and display in the specified resolution and the display speed may become faster If your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected e Images might not been transmitted caused by OS version or the driver software for Network Adapter on your computers It is highly recommended that OS and the driver should be updated to the latest 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer 1 2 1 Installing the LiveViewer The LiveViewer software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect to the projector through a network You need to log in as an administrator user to install the software 1 Turn on the computer 2 Shut down all applications 3 Insert the accompanying CD ROM into the computer s CD ROM drive NOTE After sequence 3 the User Account Control UAC dialog will appear if you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7 Please click the Allow to continue installation 4 After a moment the Choose Setup Language Choose Setup Language dialog will appear as shown on the right Select what you like to use in the list and click the OK Select the language for the installation from the choices below English v NOTE If the Choose Setup Language
89. 3 16 5 650 436 172 62 25 Arrangement continued T 2 CP WX4021N 1280X800 10 4 3 Screen height se distance Screen height mim linch m inch cm jinchi cmiinch m m m neh m neh cm jinch cm inch 0 5 1 0 8 69 51 0 6 1 4 93 69 0 8 1 8 117 86 0 9 2 1 141 103 41 11 1 1 2 5 165 120 47 13 Hee 1 4 3 3128 5 42131154 61 17 uate Hal 912 1 8 4 41721 7 22851206 81 23 2 3 5 51215 a ee me 3 0 7 3288 12 1 476 343135 38 1 3 8 9 2 360 15 1 596 429 169 48 i 4 6 11 0 433 18 21716 514203 57 23 AWARNING Pinstall the projector where you can access the power outlet easily If an abnormality should occur unplug the projector urgently Otherwise it could cause a fire or electric shock gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions If the projector falls or topples over it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the surrounding things Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock e Do not place the projector in unstable places such as an inclined surface places subject to vibration on top of a wobbly table or cart or a surface that is smaller than the projector e Do not put the projector on its side front or rear position e Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified in the manual e Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the manufacturer Read and keep the manuals
90. 3 2 Staring the LiveViewer 19 32 1 9 Profile data 1 9 1 Outline of Profile data The network setting to connect the projector and computer can be stored as a profile data Once the data is stored all you need to do is to select the data to connect to the network It is recommended when the same network connection is often used 1 9 2 Making Profile data The profile data is made on the Manual Configuration screen 123 Up to 10 profile data can be stored for each network adapter ar Dute crated Profi 1 11 S0 200s Epai pri 11 20 2000 41941 Pe iy Connection 1 Select the Profile and click the New ace aoe 164 1 10 i 11 s0y2009 sates Pel Proctor IMALI LL 0 2009 3 21 04 PM C Canigo Network Settings Mirua 2 The Create new profile will come up If you have already made 10 profile data you cannot make a new one until you delete Proska nam i a stored data Adapter name Liafhig Weekes LAN Miri PCI Epron Arlaptor Wireles settings Input all information required for your Benton 9 fers Es network connection aa N e If you want to clear the information you input ET click the Clear Paces o Subnet mak C a a E Comeu ariy P adie Subnet maik 3 Click the OK after all information is set If you don t want to store it click the Cancel 4 The new profile data is shown in the profile list if you click the OK NOTE When you make a new profile
91. 4 One authentication error reply 5 is added 1 ACK reply 06h Refer to RS 232C communication 410 2 NAK reply 15h Refer to RS 232C communication 10 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h Refer to RS 232C communication 410 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh Refer to RS 232C communication 10 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h When authentication error occurred the projector returns the error code TCP 9715 1 Command format The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of TCP 9715 are used Header Data length RS 232C command Check sum Connection ID 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 02 Fixed Data Length RS 232C commands byte length 0x0D Fixed RS 232C commands Refer to RS 232C Communication command format L410 Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data NOTE Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data e Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code e Commands are not accepted during warm up 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal The connection ID is attached for the TCP 23 s response error codes are used The connection ID is same as the sending command format 1 ACK reply 06h xxh xxh
92. 4 3 16 9 16 10 g CP WX4021N NORMALS 4 3 16 9 16 10 NATIVE _ o a ese O For an HDMI signal CP X4021N CP X5021N NORMAL lt gt 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 ve CP WX4021N NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 NATIVE O For a video signal s video signal or component video signal CP X4021N CP X5021N 4 3 16 9 14 9 a CP WX4021N 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 NATIVE Ae o o o o O For an input signal from the LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port or if there is no signal CP X4021N CP X5021N 4 3 fixed CP WX4021N 16 10 fixed e ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted e NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio setting 4 Adjusting the projector s elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen elevating the front side of the projector within 12 degrees This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it IN eye 1 Holding the projector push the elevator buttons to To loose an loose the elevator feet elevator foot push the elevator button Position the front side of the projector to the desired on the same side height as it Release the elevator buttons in order
93. A buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE NAME and press the gt or ENTER button The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed 2 Use the A buttons on the SOURCE NAME menu to select the port to be named and press the gt button The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed Right side of the menu is blank until a name is specified 3 Select an icon you d like to assign to the SOURCE NAME port in the SOURCE NAME dialog The name assigned to the port will also be automatically switched according to your icon selection Press the or ENTER button to determine your icon selection 4 Select a number you d like to assign to the port along with the icon You can select the number either from blank no number assigned 1 2 3 or 4 5 If you d like to modify the name assigned to the port select CUSTOM NAME and press the gt button continued on next page g1 ptem iescription O 6 The current name will be displayed on the first line Use the A W lt P buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The name can be a maximum SOURCE NAME of 16 characters Continued 7 To change an already inserted character press the A button to
94. AGNIFY OFF and ESC buttons Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu 160 of the projector to be controlled should be set to the same mode as the remote control Using as a simple PC mouse amp neyooarg The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer when the projector s USB TYPE B port and the computer s type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu 55 PAGE UP key Press PAGE UP button port PAGE DOWN key Press PAGE DOWN button Mouse left button Press ENTER button Move pointer Use the cursor buttons A V lt and gt ESC key Press ESC button 1 2 3 4 5 6 Mouse right button Press RESET button NOTE When the simple mouse amp keyboard function of this product does not work correctly please check the following e When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built in pointing device e g track ball like a laptop PC open BIOS setup menu then select the external mouse and disable the built in pointing device because the built in pointing device may have priority to this function e Windows 95 OSR 2 1 or higher is required for this function And also this function may not work depending on the computer s configurations and mouse drivers This function can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keybo
95. ANDBYION button steady orange Then remove the lens POWER indicator cover 3 Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control The projection lamp will light up and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green AWARNING PA strong light is emitted when the projector s power is on Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any of the projector s openings NOTE Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices e The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function which can make the projector automatically turn on For more information please see User s Manual Operating Guide Adjusting the projector s elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen elevating the front side of the projector within 12 degrees This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it 1 Holding the projector push the elevator buttons to loose the elevator feet height elevator feet aoe WN Position the front side of the projector to the desired Release the elevator buttons in o
96. B or C you will have to establish the connection manually If the manual setting screen is displayed please follow item 1 5 1 3 121 Troubleshooting E Incorrect PassCode The incorrect Passcode was input Click the Back to return to the Please enter the PassCode screen Check the PassCode on the projector screen 2115 and enter the code again 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued E A network connection could not be established Windows prevented network configuration A nabeak connection could not ba metablehnd changes vindows prevented network configuration changes You may log in the Windows under User authority Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 23 on the main and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 14 Consult to the network administrator Log in the Windows under Administrator authority After that please resume at item 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer 09 E f you need to add a Network configuration on your computer to connect to the projector This dialog will be displayed when you Do yau want to apah suggested natwork settings as foe need to add a Network configuration on E teawetine your computer to connect to the projector Siret mak eee Ta Confirm with your network administrator if I Not degli confirmation og for aking
97. DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License The Program below refers to any such program or work and a work based on the Program means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Program or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term 15 modification Each licensee is addressed as you Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running the Program is not restricted and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program independent of having been made by running the Program Whether that is true depends on what the Program does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program Y
98. H DAMAGE This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com 21 HITACHI Inspire the Next Hitachi America Ltd Digital Media Division 900 Hitachi way Chula Vista CA 91914 3556 USA CANADA Tel 1 800 225 1741 Fax 1 619 591 5418 gt http www hitachi america us digitalmedia Hitachi Europe Ltd Consumer Affairs Department PO Box 3007 Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 8ZE UNITED KINGDOM Tel 0870 405 4405 Email consumer mail hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A S Digital Media Group 77 Rue Alexandre Dumas 69120 Vaulx en Velin FRANCE Tel 04 37 42 84 30 Email france consommateur hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe GmbH Am Seestern 18 40547 Dusseldorf GERMANY Tel 211 5283 808 Fax 211 5283 809 Hotline 0180 551 25 51 12ct min Email Service germany hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A 364 Kifissias Ave amp 1 Delfon Str 152 33 Chalandri Athens GREECE Tel 210 6837200 Fax 210 6835694 Email dmgservice gr hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S r l Via T Gulli 39 20147 MILANO ITALY Hitachi Europe S A Gran Via Carles III 86 Planta 5 Edificios Trade Torre Este 08028 Barcelona SPAIN Tel 0034 934 092 5 50 Email garantias ltr hitachi es Hitachi Europe AB Fr sundaviks Alle 15 169 29 Solna SWEDEN Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd Level 3 82 Waterloo Road North Ryde N S W 2113 AUSTRALIA Tel 61 2 9888 4100 Fax 61 2 9888 4188 gt htto www hitac
99. Ha NPeMOCcTaBNAeTCA Ha YCNOBUAX Kak ecTb 6e3 kaknx nno NpAMbIXx MJN KOCBEHHbIX rapaHTn Kakoro nn6o popa B TOM ctTeneHn B KOTOPON 3TO pas3pewaeTca NDUMEHUMbIM 3AKOHOAATeNbCTBOM Mbl TakxKe He HECEM OTBeETCTBEHHOCTN N He npegoctasnaeMm KOMNeHcayn 3a kakne nn6o notepn BKNOYaAA B YACTHOCTH NOTeplO AaHHbIX NCKAXEHNE NNN OTCYTCTBNE COBMECTNMOCTN UHTepdenca c Opyrumn nporpammamn COOTBeTCTBYIOLUErO nporpammMmHoro OOecneyeHna n nnn 3a ncnonb3oBaHne COOTBeTCTByOLero nporpammMmHoro o6ecneyeHna B TON cCTeneHn B KOTOPON 3TO pa3pewaeTca NpDNMEHNMbIM 3AKOHOATENbCTBOM 12 PYCC Kn Projektoriohjelmiston kayttooikeussopimus Projektorin ohjelmisto koostuu useista itsenaisista ohjelmistomoduuleista jotka on suojattu yrityksemme ja tai kolmannen osapuolen tekijanoikeuksilla Projektori k ytt my s ohjelmistomoduuleja jotka olemme kehitt neet ja tai tuottaneet Kukin ohjelmisto ja niihin liittyv t osat mukaan lukien mutta ei rajoittuen ohjelmistoon liittyv t asiakirjat on suojattu tekij noikeuksilla ja immateriaalioikeuksilla Edell mainitut oikeudet on suojattu tekij noikeuslailla ja muilla soveltuvilla lailla Projektori k ytt Free Software Foundation Inc n USA ilmaisohjelmistomoduuleja GNU General Public License Version 2 ja GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 tai kunkin ohjelmiston lisenssisopimuksia Seuraavalta verkkosivulta saat lis tietoja kyseisten ohjelmistomoduulien ja muiden ohjelmistojen lisenssisopim
100. ICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide Item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each device and connect them correctly with suitable cables e Turn off the power of both the projector and other devices and unplug before connecting them e For details of Transmission method refer to 3 8 4 Transmission method Network Guide RS 2826 Communication Netwonk command table Names Operation Type Header Command Data i a Power Example return 00 00 02 00 Off Cool down et neue Set aiid 01 00 et et et et BE EF MAGNIFY Increment BE EF BE EF G BE EF 06 00 D9 D8 02 00 20 60 00 00 Example return 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 Error Status 3 Normal Cover error Fan error Lamp error 04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00 Temp error Air flow error Cold error Filter error BE EF E EF BE EF BE EF 01 00 BE EF Set BOARD BLACK BE EF 01 00 BE EF PICTURE MODE FREE set NORMAL BE EF FREEZE BE EF 01 00 BE EF 02 00 Example return 00 00 01 00 04 00 10 00 Normal Cinema Dynamic Custom 20 00 21 00 22 00 40 00 BOARD BLACK BOARD GREEN WHITEBOARD DAY TIME Get Get Get BE EF BRIGHTNESS BE EF 03 Decrement BE EF et ee BE EF 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 00 00 BE EF CONTRAST BE EF BE EF continued on next page 17 Senses a ae eade Comm
101. ION dialog 142 e MIC VOLUME Turns on off the MIC VOLUME dialog 22147 e ECO MODE Turns on off the ECO MODE dialog 44 Using A V buttons selects the picture input port to be selected with pressing the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on the remote control MY SOURCE You can use this function not only for document cameras but also computers and other equipment Dorr ER IN1 lt lt COMPUTER IN2 LAN USB TYPE A VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT amp HDMI USB TYPE B continued on next page MY BUTTON Continued 58 ltem scription O Selecting this item displays the SERVICE SERVICE menu gt AUTO ADJUST FAST Select an item using the A V buttons FILTERMESSAGE 500 and press the gt button or the ENTER REMOTE FRED button on the remote control to execute the item FAN SPEED Using the A V buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans The HIGH is the mode for use at highlands etc Note that the projector is noisier when the HIGH is selected HIGH NORMAL AUTO ADJUST Using the A V buttons to select one of the mode When the DISABLE is selected the automatic adjustment feature is disabled FINE FAST DISABLE ti FINE Finer tuning including H SIZE adjustment FAST Faster tuning setting H SIZE to prearranged data for the input signal e Depending on conditions such as input image signal cable to the projector environment around the projector etc the automatic adjustment
102. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 11 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 12 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LO
103. LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUC
104. MPONENT gt S VIDEO gt VIDEO 7 menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected 1154 If VIDEO button is pressed when COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 port is selected the projector will check HDMI port first Press the MY SOURCE DOC CAMERA button on MY SOURCE the remote control The input signal will be changed DOC CAMERA button into the signal you set as MY SOURCE 458 input port that connected the document camera Searching an input signal SEARCH button 4 Press SEARCH button on the remote control The projector will start to check its input ports as below in order to find any input signals When an input is found the projector will stop searching and display the image If no signal is found the projector will return to the state selected before the operation m gt COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN v VIDEO USB TYPEA A NV S VIDEO USB TYPE B 4 COMPONENT HDMI e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu M54 the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Selecting an aspect ratio 4 Press ASPECT button on the remote control ASPECT button Each time you press the button the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn O For a computer signal CP X4021N CP X5021N NORMAL lt gt
105. Motwork settings the Network configuration displayed on the dialog is OK and then click the Yes E a i Click the NO then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu and go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 14 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued If you put a check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings the projector memorizes current configuration and this dialog is not displayed again To display this dialog again click Option icon in the LiveViewer main menu and remove the check mark in the box Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings If you want to change the Network configuration to add click the Change A ele a ince dialog for changing the Network configuration ra as shown to the right will be displayed Enter IP address and subnet mask then click the OK Procedure to connect to the projector will start Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 430 oe Ee If you click the Cancel you will return to the dialog for adding a Network configuration If the entered IP address and projector s IP BEES TET EP COP TOIT address are the same a warning dialog shown Pam eso sy E jiha War Eri nee to the right will be displayed Click the OK and then enter a different IP address
106. OMPUTER NT ltem _Desoription Using the A V buttons switches the progress mode TV FILM OFF T e This function works only for a video signal s video signal component video signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI PROGRESSIVE signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 e When TV or FILM is selected the screen image will be sharp FILM adapts to the 2 3 Pull Down conversion system But these may cause a certain defect for example jagged line of the picture for a quick moving object In such a case please select OFF even though the screen image may lose sharpness Using the A V buttons switches the noise reduction mode HIGH MID LOW E VIDEO NR e This function works only for a video signal s video signal component video signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 Using the A V buttons switches the mode for color space AUTO amp RGB SMPTE240 REC709 REC601 _ e This item can be selected only for a computer signal except for COLOR SPACE signals from the LAN USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports or a component video signal except SCART RGB e The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode e The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals In such a case it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO Using the A V buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT ports COMPONENT
107. Oy Communication When the projector connects to the computer by RS 232C communication the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 17 Connection 1 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the computer s RS 232C port with a RS 232C cable cross Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on 4 Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF EQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide Mi y nh nt i RS 232C S cross RS 232C port CONTROL port of the computer of the projector 00000 O00000 o eseeje Oeesehe at an si i o DTR GND DSR RTS DTS DM BRON S Z J i N N SSS SSS SSS OSS OY S N A W OO ON I OO ON _ A oono AOU N gt O ep i N SSS SS SS SST OSS ll CU z Communicaion settings 1 Protocol 19200bps 8N1 2 Command format h shows hexadecimal a ECE aon LE Pa LS lt DECREMENT gt Decrement setup value bL bH by 1 AN robb Header code Packet Data size Set BEh EFh 03h 06h OOh to byte number 0 4 CRC flag For byte number 5 6 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 17 Action Set functional code to byte
108. PASSWORD When a password is set for MyScreen e The MyScreen registration function and menu will be unavailable e The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable e The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen and the menu will be unavailable Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these functions e Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD 2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu SR EEEE 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER Aa PASSWORD box large Enter the registered Inquiring Code OES BTR password and the screen will return to the e sa MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will large close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed E bySecreean PASS FORD HOTE HEW PASSWORD ooog continued on next page 72 ltem scription O PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless a registered Code is input 1 Turning on the PIN LOCK 1 1 Use the A
109. Point animation at full speed The compression rate being used for transferring the images is too low In some combinations of computer s video card and application software there is a possibility that true image especially movies played by media player cannot be transferred to the projector with the LiveViewer Things to Check Switching the priority to Transmission Speed under the options menu may help to improve speed Switching the priority to Transmission Speed under the options menu may help to improve speed If there is a video acceleration level adjustment function in your application please try to adjust it Refer your application manual in detail Reference Page Number Network connection between the computer and projector is disconnected when computer display resolution is changed during Network Presentation The computer Projector network connection might be disconnected when computer display resolution is changed while displaying picture Please re connect using Connect button after changing computer display resolution or change display resolution before connecting with the LiveViewer Images contain lots of interference The compression rate being used for transferring the images is too high Try setting the priority to Image Quality in the LiveViewer Option menu You may experience a drop in speed Neither trans
110. Projector CP X4021N CP X5021N CP WX4021N User s Manual detailed Operating Guide VAY AWAY A j AUN AI VA URN wt j os d 3 Wu KAS w Thank you for purchasing this projector ANNOU NS MEMUEN Various symbols are used in this manual The meanings of these symbols are described below AWARNING This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling ACAUTION This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Q Please refer to the pages written following this symbol NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment e Mac is a registered trademark of Apple Inc e Windows DirectDraw and Direct3D are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States a
111. SS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General P
112. T RGB 01 00 01 00 Get AUTO 01 00 0A 00 NTSC 04 00 01 00 05 00 S VIDEO SECAM 09 00 FORMAT NTSC4 43 02 00 M PAL N PAL t U TI E E E 00 00 Execute 00 00 LOW Get 02 00 Get 00 00 PAL E E E E ee U TI E EF BE EF BE EF BE EF AUTO NTSC PAL BE EF C VIDEO SECAM BE EF FORMAT NTSC4 43 06 00 e D ee W Tl Tl W U 1 71 E E M PAL EE 06 00 N PAL EE 06 00 01 00 Get F 06 00 02 00 W m m continued on next page 21 Names Operation Type Leader Command Data i CRC Type Setting code AUTO 06 00 BA 77 01 00 13 22 00 00 Set VIDEO 06 00 2A 76 01 00 13 22 01 00 HDMI FORMAT COMPUTER 10 AUTO E 06 00 02 00 06 00 00 00 E 06 00 00 00 Set NORMAL EE eee EE EE E E E E U U T T EE EE E E m m Tmin TI U U T T 06 00 01 00 02 00 06 00 00 00 06 00 01 00 03 00 06 00 02 00 e 03 06 00 OD D6 02 00 10 20 00 00 set ___AUTO _ BE 06 00 03 00 COMPUTER IN2 E 06 00 E EF 06 00 E EF 06 00 06 00 Get 06 00 E EF 06 00 E 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 06 00 E5 D1 06 00 OD 20 00 00 F 06 00 KEYSTONE V E EF 06 00 EE 06 00 E EF 06 00 BE EF BE EF pai H BE EF 06 00 98 D8 06 00 20 70 00 00 E EF 06 00 W UJ T T COMPUTER IN1 W TI 06 00 01 00 G s AUTO 8 G WO m m TI WO TI a p EEE i zZ W TI FRAME LOCK Se COMPUTER IN1 F N Get OFF FRAME LOCK Se COMPUTER IN2
113. T button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and push the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64 PROJECTOR characters mare NAME 3 To change an already inserted character press the A V button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines and use the lt P gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK c on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page 66 ps ttem escription Selecting this item displays the MY E WY IMAGE IMAGE menu IMAGE PRESENTATIONFILE To store images in the projector the ee ATTAT application software PJImg Projector KO Image Tool that can be downloaded from our website is required Use the A V buttons to select an item which is a still image by the MY IMAGE My Image Function in the User s manual Network Guide and the gt or ENTER button to display the image e T
114. T in the dialog with A V buttons and press the or ENTER button Alternatively point at RETURN in the dialog with the A V buttons and press the lt or ENTER button to return to the menu in step 1 26 Using the magnify feature 1 Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control MAGNIFY The picture will be magnified and the MAGNIFY dialog will ON OFF button appear on the screen When the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the first time after the projector is turned on the picture will be zoomed by 1 5 times On the dialog triangle marks to show each direction will be displayed While the triangles are displayed on the dialog use the A W lt b cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area A magnifying glass icon will be displayed on the dialog when the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed while the dialog with the triangles is displayed While the magnifying glass icon is displayed on the dialog use the A V cursor buttons to adjust the magnification ratio The magnification ratio will be adjusted with fine steps And changes in the ratio in single steps are subtle so they may be hard to recognize Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no operation The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed when the dialog has automatically disappeared While the MAGNIFY dialog is displayed press t
115. TAS sesan r ermcneancicomsaa ied E EEEE 39 2 1 3 Switching the display MOde cessed sina degurncntsteapndbenind tetamnenhitaddantusndnaitenhaehdbebdadeneebhensentanld 40 2TA OpTON MENU a sdtecstececcaterscnadesedtcahcestansecassnuthetlsuetaecudatessiensigite ONA r a ia ieren i is 41 2 2 Starting the Network Presentation ccccecccssseeeceeeeeceeeeecseeeeesseeeees 43 2 2 IS Nea MOE isr a E E E 43 2 2 2 Presenter INOS cctcxeareseccciaansneansnouensctaeecotaaiecnauactonsenuamnacandedsanianaddialaciiddorananateatceiecenan 44 2 200 Display User Name x cuies sxxwecsncivmiie aren anwaiaiiniacovehiany nitionbsastdntediaiabedaviwedecnwhewstiaanienessmertiancbet 44 De WED COMMON sescpescsuecensdentsnsevenetecesedccesenesscanesseueccecetnattesteceauecees 45 SN LOGON soccer bccn ect sacs tthatnchee E quatienumtusemtstemodts 46 3 2 Network Information sic snnioreieiiinncmansinddasmenmsaild acissuuistinasiondtbwunnaaeseeddumiatyeveddesene 48 3 3 Network Settings siicesacwetisecwienemcicieasindiaamscu yeh dents tuictnnden s deindamneinbidumeiduatsanencs 49 3 4 Port Settings tere sesidoenietictsde cen ttntecie nal selene opi odslaneutnntiacise a R EREE osu dob 50 3 9 IAIN eo NS Si poche cect tect ott cera soli edertepo N e aa RERE E n 52 3 6 Alert Settings gecscnnatece enosmsne neta dityoreataaianata nen seeinnedaasueteaduciacetsensdantiolsamnieaniee 53 3 7 Schedule Settings sacacscdsasnccncescasaedcosdasdionsdedadateniwudoedusiaasdaeuteaduidecansa
116. To prevent any trouble turn on off the projector in right order mentioned below unless specifying e Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder e Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder Take care not to fatigue your eyes Rest the eyes periodically Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people e It is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the neighborhood environment Connecting with notebook computer When connecting with notebook computer set to valid the RGB external image output setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information Lamp WARNING AN A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with_a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition when the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put in trash Dispose of in accord with environmental laws For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in USA For
117. UTER button VIDEO Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button BLANK Assigned the same operation as BLANK button FREEZE Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button MUTE Assigned the same operation as MUTE button MENU Assigned the same operation as MENU button A Assigned the same operation as A button v Assigned the same operation as WV button Assigned the same operation as lt button Assigned the same operation as button Assigned the same operation as ENTER button RESET Assigned the same operation as RESET button PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button PAGE DOWN Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button SLIDESHOW Starts the Slideshow NOTE The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that performs an action while holding a button clicked down e Since the repeat function is not available click the button repeatedly as many times as you require e Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while the Web Remote Control sends your request command one time only Release the button then click it again e When the POWER button is pushed a message window comes up to confirm the operation To control the power push OK otherwise push Cancel e The PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP buttons on the Web Remote Control cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector 3 12 Projector Status Displays and configures the current projector s
118. V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the gt or the ENTER button to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu to select ON Select TRANSITION DETECTOR ON and the current angle and MIRROR ENTER NEW PASSWORD setting will be recorded The ENTER NEW oe PASSWORD box small will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the A W lt P buttons to enter a box small password Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the button to display the NEW E TRANSITION DETECTOR PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same NEN PASSVORD AGAN a000 ia RANEET ION DETECTOR Oht TRANSITION password again DETECTOR 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press a deal tlt the gt button to display the NOTE NEW NOTE NEW PASSWORD ooog PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the button on the projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu e Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password e This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off the AC power e This feature may not function properly if the projector is not in a stable position when ON is selected 2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display
119. V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select PIN LOCK and press the gt button or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the PIN LOCK on x off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN Enter PIN Code Code box will be displayed 1 3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the A W lt gt COMPUTER or INPUT button The PIN Code again box will appear Reenter Gaia the same PIN code This will complete the PIN Bisisscuisy code registration e If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 1 Afterwards anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code If an incorrect PIN code is input the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again MORON TERS i it m n E PIN LOCK If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Enter PIN code box is displayed This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power is turned off e Please do not forget your PIN code 2 Turning off the PIN LOCK 2 1 Follow the proce
120. W OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change You can do so by About the OpenSSL Toolkit permitting redistribution under these terms or alternatively under the terms of the ordinary General Public License To apply these terms attach the following notices to the library It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the library s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright lt year gt lt name of author gt This library is free software you can redistribute it and or
121. Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr BNC jack x5 HDMI connector x1 MONOTOR OUT D sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr RCA jack x3 Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1 RCA jack x1 AUDIO IN1 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 AUDIO IN2 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 AUDIO IN3 R L RCA jack x2 AUDIO OUT R L RCA jack x2 USB TYPEA USB type A connector x1 USB TYPE B USB type B connector x1 CONTROL D sub 9 pin plug x1 RJ45 jack x1 3 5 mm mono mini jack x1 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 Lamp DT01171 Filter set MU06641 Mounting accessory HAS 3010 Bracket for ceiling mount HAS 204L Fixing adaptor for low Optional parts ceilings HAS 304H Fixing adaptor for high ceilings Laser remote control RC RO08 For more information please consult your dealer 18 Troubleshooting Warranty and after service lf an abnormal operation such as smoke strange odor or excessive sound should occur stop using the projector immediately Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector first refer to Troubleshooting of User s Manual Operating Guide Instant Stack Guide and Network Guide and run through the suggested checks If this does not resolve the problem please consult your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Please check the following web address where you may find the latest information for this projector Product information and http www hitachi america us digitalmedia Manual
122. Y and NETWORK to the factory default 98 NN switch Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect check and cope with it according to the following table Cases not involving a machine defect oe The electrical power cord is not plugged in 15 Correctly connect the power cord The main power source has been interrupted during operation such as by a power outage blackout etc Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes then turn the power on again Power does not come on Either there is no lamp and or lamp cover or either of these has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again Signal source does not correctly work Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the manual of the source device Neither sounds nor pictures are outputted The BLANK function for pictures and the MUTE function for sounds are working AV MUTE may be active Refer to the item Sound does not come out and No pictures are displayed on the next page to turn off the MUTE and BLANK functi
123. a http av hitachi com projector index html Kontakta din terf rs ljare f r fr gor ang ende licensierad programvara Se licensavtal f r varje programvara p f ljande sidor M15 och licensavtal for varje programvara p webbsidan f r detaljer om licensvillkor och s vidare Eftersom f ljande licensavtal uppr ttats av en tredje part och inte av oss r originaltexten p engelska Eftersom programmet programvarumodulen r licensierad som gratisprogram levereras programmet i befintligt skick utan n gon typ av garanti vare sig uttryckt eller underf rst dd till den omfattning som r till tet enligt till mplig lag Vi tar oss inget ansvar eller kompensation f r f rlust av n got slag inklusive men inte begr nsat till f rlust av data exakthet eller kompabilitet med gr nssnitt mellan andra program f r den programvara som avses och eller bruk av den programvara som avses till den omfattning som r till tet enligt till mplig lag 11 SVEN SKA JIMueHSMOHHOe cornaweHne C KOHEYHBIM NonbsoBatenem 06 CNOnbSOBaHMM NporpamMHoro oecneyenna Npoektopa IporpammHoe obecneyeHue npoekTopa COCTOUT U3 HECKONbKUX CAMOCTOATENbHbIX Mogynenv nporpamMuHoro obecneyeHug npn 3TOM aBTOpckne NpaBa n nnn aBTOpckne npaBa TpeTbnX CTOPOH CYLIECTBYIOT B OTHOWEHUNM KAXAOTO U3 NOAOOHbIX MogAynen nporpamMuoro obecneyeuua Mpoektop Takxe UCnONb3yeT nporpammMmHoe o6ecneyenne pa3paboTaHHoe n nnn NpesocTaBNeHHoOe Hawe KOMNaHMeNn Mbi pacno
124. a work that uses the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts
125. a s chronione prawem autorskim i innymi maj cymi zastosowanie prawami Ponadto projektor korzysta z bezp atnych modu w oprogramowania licencjonowanych na zasadzie GNU General Public License Version 2 i GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 ustanowionych przez Free Software Foundation Inc U S lub porozumie licencyjnych dla poszczegolnych programow Umowy licencyjne dla takich modutow oprogramowania oraz innego oprogramowania mo na znale na poni szej stronie internetowej Adres strony internetowej http av hitachi com projector index html Pytania dotycz ce licencjowanego oprogramowania mo na kierowa do swojego sprzedawcy Szczeg y warunk w licencji oraz podobne informacje dotycz ce um w licencyjnych dla ka dego oprogramowania mo na znale na nast puj cych stronach 15 lub na stronach internetowych Poniewa nast puj ce umowy licencyjne zosta y sporz dzone prze strony trzecie pozostaj w oryginalnym j zyku angielskim Poniewa ten program modu oprogramowania jest na bezp atnej licencji dostarczany jest bez adnych gwarancji jasno wyra onych lub implikowanych w pe nym zakresie dopuszczonym prawem Nie bierzemy adnej odpowiedzialno ci ani nie rekompensujemy adnych strat w czaj c ale nie ograniczaj c si do utraty danych utraty precyzji lub utraty kompatybilno ci pomi dzy innymi programami spowodowanych przez rzeczone oprogramowanie i lub wykorzystanie rzeczonego op
126. ail This file seems to be broken or not supported format A file that cannot be displayed on the thumbnail screen is ral indicated by a file format icon 81 PC LESS Presentation continued Full Screen Mode The Full Screen mode shows a full display image To display in Full Screen mode select an image in the Thumbnail screen Then press the ENTER button on the remote control or the INPUT button on the keypad or click ENTER on the Web Remote Control Full screen display The following functions can be supported in the Full Screen mode Button operation The keypad Web Remote on the in web browser projector software The remote Functions control v gt or PAGE DOWN A lt or y DOWN RIGHT or or Shows the next picture gt PAGE DOWN A UP LEFT or or Shows the previous picture lt PAGE UP ENTER Displays Thumbnail NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed e It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed 82 PC LESS Presentation continued Slideshow mode The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail screen menu 478 You can start this function from the Slideshow menu To display the Slideshow menu select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail mode an
127. ain menu is replaced by the icon you selected NOTE The image transmission will be stopped when you click the Single mode button while the projector is in the Single PC mode or you click one of the Multi mode buttons that shows the quarter screen which is currently displaying your computer images in the Multi PC mode e If the Multi PC mode is selected the projector screen is automatically divided to 4 zones e If the Presenter mode is set on in the computer whose image is currently on screen in the Single PC mode the H button cannot be clicked on other computers e If you select the button of the quarter screen displaying images from another computer the image transmission from that computer will be stopped The display mode can be set also by using the MULTI PC MODE in the PRESENTATION item in the NETWORK menu The last setting made will take effect regardless of the setting method Refer to LHNETWORK menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide for the function on the projector 40 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 4 Option menu Clicking the Option button displays the option menu on screen Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings Ore Optimize Performance e Transmission speed C Image quality vV Presenter Mode MV Display User Name Unnamed OO Not displaying confirmation dialog for adding Network settings This setting allows y
128. al equipment i e display devices This projector is VESA DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC display data channel compatible Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the COMPUTER IN1 port DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is attempted Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug and Play monitor continued on next page 10 Connecting with your devices continued Computer USB TYPEA DISPLAY RS 232C b Tn 0 WO a ti oo Pt ES ES LI L USB TYPEA y y d DC5V 0 5A HOMI USB YPE B Cum UTER IN1 GIY LA N _ o IADR IAB n CER o OAOA H 055 en N4 041 SL AN COMPUTER IN2 H H E H olv V O LAN AUDIO OUT AUDIO REMOTE n e Mic AOT O CONTROL AUDIO IN2 L NOTE Before connecting the projector to a computer consult the computer s manual and check the compatibility of the signal level the synchronization methods and the display resolution output to the projector Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which are not supported by this projector Although the projector can display signals with reso
129. alene er etablert av en tredjepart er de oppgitt p originalspr ket engelsk Fordi programmet Programvaremodulen er lisensiert gratis er programmet utgitt uten noen garanti enten uttrykt eller underforst tt i den utstrekning loven tillater Og vi tar intet ansvar eller kompenserer for noe tap inkludert men ikke begrenset til tap av data tap av n yaktighet eller kompatibilitetstap med grensesnittet mellom andre programmer av programvaren det gjelder og eller bruk av programvaren det gjelder i den utstrekning loven tillater NOR SK Gebruiksrechtovereenkomst EULA voor de projectorsoftware De software in de projector bestaat uit verschillende onafhankelijke softwaremodules waarop ons auteursrecht en of dat van derden is gevestigd De projector gebruikt ook softwaremodules die wij hebben ontwikkeld en of geproduceerd En op zulke software en aanverwante producten maar niet beperkt tot documenten die betrekking hebben op software is ook ons auteurs en intellectuele eigendomsrecht gevestigd Bovenstaande rechten worden beschermd door de wet inzake auteursrecht en ander toepasselijk recht En de projector gebruikt softwaremodules die staan geregistreerd als freeware volgens GNU General Public License Version 2 en GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 van Free Software Foundation Inc VS of gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten voor elke software Raadpleeg de volgende webpagina voor de gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten betreffende zu
130. ancelled and a message is displayed indicating the result e To make Presenter mode setting use LiveViewer For details see the section Presenter mode in the User s Manual Network Guide PRESENTATION If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC mode on LiveViewer and send their images to the projector you can select the display mode on the projector from two options below Single PC mode displays the image of the selected MULTI PC computer on full screen MODE Multi PC mode displays the images sent from up to four computers on screen that is divided into quarter sections Select this item to display a dialog Use the dialog to change the display mode as explained below continued on next page 68 ltem scription O e To change from Multi PC mode to Single PC mode select one of computers in the dialog using the A lt gt buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button Press the gt button to choose OK and then press ENTER or INPUT again The image for the selected computer is displayed on full screen e To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode press button to choose OK in the dialog and press the ENTER or INPUT button The display mode is changed e For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi PC mode on your computer see the section Switching the display mode in the User s Manual Network Guide PRESENTATION e The Presenter mode setting of the selected
131. and Data Data p yp Action Type Setting code ae Execute BE EF 06 00 A4 D2 06 00 01 70 o0 00 1 DEFAULT BE EF 01 00 20 00 1 CUSTOM 01 00 10 00 2 DEFAULT 21 00 2 CUSTOM 11 00 3 DEFAULT 22 00 Set 3 CUSTOM 12 00 GAMMA _4 DEFAULT 23 00 4 CUSTOM 13 00 5 DEFAULT 24 00 5 CUSTOM 01 00 14 00 6 DEFAULT 01 00 25 00 6 CUSTOM Get O E EF E EF A BE EF Ramp E EF et Get BE EF Usor Gamma increment Decrement BE E 00 00 User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 C2 06 00 50 70 00 00 Point 1 Reset e BE E 06 00 F4 FF 02 00 91 30 00 00 ae Increment BE E 06 00 92 FF 04 00 91 30 00 00 Decrement BE E 06 00 43 FE 05 00 91 30 00 00 User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 A4 C3 06 00 51 70 00 00 Point 2 Reset Get BE E 06 00 BO FF 02 00 92 30 00 00 oy increment BE E 00 00 Decrement BE E 00 00 User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 EO C3 06 00 52 70 00 00 Point 3 Reset e BE E 06 00 4C FE 02 00 93 30 00 00 a ee increment BE E 00 00 Decrement BE E 00 00 User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 1C C2 06 00 53 70 00 00 Point 4 Reset BE EF User Gamma Increment BE EF Decrement BE EF User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 68 c3 06 00 54 70 00 00 Point 5 Reset Get BE EF 06 00 C4 FE 02 00 95 30 00 00 User Gamma Increment BE EF Decrement BE EF User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 94 C2 06 00 55 70 00 00 Point 6 Reset continued on next
132. and Messenger Port Port 9719 e The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu 85 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued Command Format Command formats differ among the different communication ports e TCP 23 You can use the RS 232C commands without any changes The reply data format is the same as the RS 232C commands LU RS 232C Communication in the User s Manual Operating Guide Technical However the following reply will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled lt Reply in the event of an authentication error gt Reply Error code Ox1F 0x04 0x00 e TCP 9715 Send Data format The following formatting is added to the header 0 x 02 Data length 0 x 0D Checksum 1 byte and Connection ID 1 byte of the RS 232C commands Header Data length RS 232Ccommand Check Sum i e 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 0x02 Fixed Data length RS 232C commands byte length 0x0D Fixed RS 232C command RS 232C commands that start with OxBE OxEF 13 bytes Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 Thi
133. ant to connect the projector and computer Wireless LAN The projector is required to be connected to an access point by a LAN cable Go to C126 Wired LAN If you use the wired LAN go to ELJ27 25 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued Wireless LAN 1 The setting on the access point 7 Enter the following information SSID WirelessAccessPoint example Encryption WEP64bit example Encryption key 2 example Mode INFRASTRUCTURE 2 Click the Next 3 Enter the following information that is set in the projector 3 IP address 192 168 1 10 example Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 example 4 Click the Connect 5 The wireless connection will be established Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 7 Contact the network administrator to find out the setting on the access point 2 If you use an encryption you need to set it Contact the network administrator to check the encryption key that is set in the projector The encryption key is always shown as 3 To find the network setting on the projector refer to the NOTE 422 26 1 7 Configuring the network settings manually continued Wired LAN 1 Enter the following information for the projector 7 IP address 192 168 1 10 example Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 example 2 Click the Connect 3 The network connection will be established
134. any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product gt Do not wet the product gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used Oil may harm the product resulting in malfunction or falling from the mounted position gt Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or the leaned table Do not place the product unstably Place the projector so that it does not protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables from the projector when carrying the projector gt Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is on gt Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents while the projection lamp is on Also after the lamp goes out do not approach them for a while since too hot Regulatory notices About Electro Magnetic Interference In CANADA This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 In the US and other places where the FCC regulations are applicable Declaration of Conformity Trade name HITACHI Model Number CP X4021N CP X5021N CP WX4021N Responsible Party Hitachi America Ltd Address 900 Hitachi way Chula Vista CA 91914 3556 U S A Telephone Number 1 800 225 1741 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two condi
135. ard e You cannot do things like press two buttons at once for instance pressing two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally e This function is activated only when the projector is working properly This function is not available in any of the following cases While the lamp is warming up The POWER indicator blinks in green When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is selected While displaying BLANK 428 TEMPLATE 452 or MY IMAGE 167 screen When any menu is displayed on the screen While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the sound volume correcting the keystone correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen Turning on the power 4 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector and the STANDBY ON button outlet POWER indicator 2 Make sure that the POWER indicator is srhpsron yew steady orange 497 Then remove the lens cover 3 Press STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control The projection lamp will light up and POWER indicator will begin blinking in green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green 1197 To display the picture select an input signal according to the section Selecting an input signal 179 Turning off the power 4 Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the remote control The mes
136. are e ai prodotti annessi compresi ma non limitati ai documenti relativi ai software diritti di cui sopra sono tutelati dalla legge sul copyright e dalle altre leggi applicabili Il proiettore utilizza moduli software concessi in licenza come freeware in conformita alla GNU General Public License Version 2 e alla GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 stabilite dalla Free Software Foundation Inc Stati Uniti o dagli accordi di licenza per ciascun software Consultare la seguente pagina web per gli accordi di licenza relativi a tali moduli software e ad altri software Indirizzo pagina web http av hitachi com projector index html Rivolgersi al rivenditore per ulteriori informazioni riguardanti il software concesso in licenza Consultare gli accordi di licenza di ciascun software alle seguenti pagine 175 e gli accordi di licenza di ciascun software sulla pagina web per informazioni sulle condizioni di licenza e cosi via Siccome i seguenti accordi di licenza sono stabiliti da un terzo e non da noi sono riportati nella versione originale in lingua inglese Siccome il programma il modulo software concesso in licenza a titolo gratuito il programma viene fornito cos com senza garanzia di alcun tipo n espressa n implicita nei limiti consentiti dalla legge applicabile Inoltre non ci assumiamo responsabilit alcuna e non provvederemo ad alcun risarcimento per qualsivoglia perdita compresa ma non limitata a
137. arleinciavicunintresdiedeaixeimpiecnnladlanxdlacdaptounelxoientanecs 4 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer ccccccsseeseeeeeceeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeenans 4 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer 0 0 cecccccceseececeeeeseseeseseeseseeeeseeeesesesesenansenseeens 6 1 2 1 Installing the LiveViewer wseenciise cacedduatastocarhisisuediadiadumiasakhineddiduibineebebhiauabandiutiateseinbnniad stan 6 1 2 2 Updating the LiveViewer n snnnsennnsesnresnnretnnensrnrresrnrnsrtrrrerrtrestrtnesrnrentntrestnteenttneennne 7 1 3 Process to connect the network sucuseinceniscnanitnianndsoncundmresncivannenennndremauenes 8 13 1 Process OVEIVIEW saver eoirnmtainncieu ai vaunousinanacuntanaiantalveusnisunesdacenuennacnpadnnn doa waranneuiniansanintamanas 8 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer cose scedeacensonrincs nxalend ioiedbaswsn ne tadinnenhsauens alee Micledsheseadeaudismbincdstaue beasties 9 1 4 Selecting the network Connection mode cccceccceeeseeceeeeeceesseeeeeeeeees 10 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN scecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 10 124 2 Selecting MY COMMEGCUION ccccascoscteuceseeiceeeccnsedeperd axis E rar Ea rre rA eaer anoi Eniri 12 1 5 Selecting the network connection method ccccseeeecseeeeeeesseeseeeeeees 14 1 3 1 PASSCODE CONMECHON aii amianabidinteniaintt wxtcinissnnrddtoinsiamtewiaanosndianeieuentesntdlenanicewiaanesadieolen 15
138. ars check and cope with it according to the following table Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on There is no input signal Please confirm the signal input connection and the status of the signal source The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B E155 Ta Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture USE DISPLAY Is invai input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use einai Alico Match decal the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input 71 gt COMPUTER IN 1 HO INPUT IS DETECTED Projector is waiting for an image file Check the hardware connection settings on the projector and network related settings The computer Projector network connection might be disconnected Please re connect using Connect button of the LiveViewer Using the LiveViewer in the User s Manual Network Guide The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is Pi CUTER IN not within the specified range SYNC S GUT OF RANGE 1 i 123kKH2 E 123z Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source Specs E EER I An improper signal is input me E Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs continued on next page 95 Related messages continued Message De
139. artincnesitacstdssestendeon dsensassteceeadiostonsdtaee ban i 7 Other Functions ccc cecec cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeesseeseeneaeeesenenees 78 1 1 E mail Alerts covet Garcte reste gece sees cn fue bvavcon in ten careadooustuens oiotcuanktrauieuseevaecias 78 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP cccceceeceeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeess 80 3 Event Scheduling pasion csitccpeste jaca dua bacon ta aden Pageccecnd aaia ia 81 7 4 Command Control via the Network ccccccecseeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesneeees 84 8 Troubleshooting ccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeneseneseneseeeees 89 9 Warranty and after sales service cccceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 92 I Connection to the network 1 1 System requirements 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer through the network v Projector v LAN cable to connect the projector to a network CAT 5 or greater Computer minimum 1 set equipped with the network feature 100Base TX or 10Base T 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer The LiveViewer software needs to be installed on all the computers to connect to the projector through a network To use the LiveViewer your computer needs to meet the following requirements v OS One of the following Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition 32 bit version only Windows Vista H
140. at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp e Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws e Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from a ceiling This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken e Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury e Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product e If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative e Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use e Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage Cleaning and replacing the air filter
141. author s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The 18 ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software deve
142. ay not work well e This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR 2174 is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT 2126 Selecting this item displays the KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT dialog For details see PERFECT FIT in Correcting the distortion 126 e This is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON 474 Using the A V buttons turns on off the AUTO ECO MODE ON amp OFF e When ON is selected the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless of the ECO MODE below setting An OSD message AUTO ECO MODE will be displayed for tens of seconds when the projector starts with this function activated Using the A V buttons turns off on the Eco mode NORMAL amp ECO e When the ECO is selected acoustic noise and screen brightness are reduced e When AUTO ECO MODE above is set to ON the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless this setting Using the A V buttons switches the mode for mirror status e NORMAL H INVERT V INVERT H amp V INVERT If the Transition Detector is on and MIRROR status is changed TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm 474 will be displayed when projector is restarted after the AC power is turned off continued on next page 44 o ltem Descripon O Using A V buttons switches the standby mode setting between NORMAL and SAVING NORMAL amp SAVING When SAVING is selected the power consumption in the standby mo
143. buttons changes the digital range for input from the HDMI port AUTO NORMAL ENHANCED te e Feature AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode NORMAL sets the suitable mode for DVD signals 16 235 ENHANCED sets the suitable mode for computer signals 0 255 e If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak try finding a more suitable mode HDMI RANGE continued on next page 40 ltem escription O O O The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports can be set 1 Use the A buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select TER IN the computer input signal type 7 AUTO SYNC ON G OFF COMPUTER N 2 COMPUTERIN Selecting the AUTO mode allows you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the port Please refer to Technical for the connection of component video input to COMPUTER IN1 2 port e In the AUTO mode the picture may be distorted with certain input signals In such a case remove the signal connector so that no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF and then reconnect the signal Set the frame lock function on off for each port 1 Use the A V buttons to select the input ports 2 Use the lt gt buttons to turn the FRAME LOCK frame lock function on off ON amp OFF e This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical frequency of 49 to 51Hz 59 to 61 Hz e When ON i
144. color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern Choose an item using the lt gt buttons and adjust the level using the A V buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern gt Gray scale of 9 steps t Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps e Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a e malfunction Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the strength of whole color Weak Strong e This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the tint Reddish Greenish e This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal e For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals 34 continued on next page pS ttem i escription Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the sharpness Weak Str
145. con on the Desktop in your computer 2 Select Start All Programs Projector Tools LiveViewer on Windows menu Then proceed to item 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode 10 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode After starting the LiveViewer the Select the Saher the Hetverork Comecon thal you would ike bo use Network Connection screen comes up Ft Wredoge LAN Select the network connection that you would like Molino to use There are 3 options in the menu irana hawk Cort Lab Wak LAN Miri PCD Esper e Wireless LAN ee e Wired LAN e My Connection Net gt eet If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN proceed to item 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN below If you select My Connection jump to item 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection L12 NOTE This dialog will not be displayed if the computer has just one network adapter and no My Connection is registered Proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 114 e Select Wireless LAN only when you connect the computer and the access point via wireless network and connect the access point and the projector via wired network since the projector doesn t have wireless LAN function 1 4 1 Selecting either the wireless LAN or wired LAN If you select either the wireless LAN or wired LAN mops etais epa a list of the network adapters in your computer is MG a E N E aa
146. connection ID 2 NAK reply 15h xxh 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h xxh 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh xxh 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h xxh 6 Projector busy reply 1Fh xxxxh xxh When the projector is too busy to receives the command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the authentication password is set to password and the random 8 bytes are a572f60c 1 Select the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes a5 72f60c from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes a5 72f60c and the authentication password password and it becomes a5 72f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5
147. ctions of that work are not derived from the Program and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program or with a work based on the Program on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may copy and distribute the Program or a work based on it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following a Accompany it with the complete corresponding machin ereadable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or b Accompany it with a written off
148. d is input the ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed again If incorrect password is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect password is input 3 Items shown in the table below can be performed If you have forgotten your password 1 While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed press and hold the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the gt inguiring Code button on the projector D1 2345 6789 2 The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed e If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 ENTER PASSWORD 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu Sa to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE PIERCEN and press the gt button to display the ENTER rani NEW PASSWORD box 2 Use the A lt P gt buttons to enter the new password 3 Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the sS assii SECURITY gt button to display the NEW PASSWORD A PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same password again CHANGE 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt NOTE NEW PASSWORD button and the NOTE NEW
149. d press the ENTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector The following operations can be accessible while the Slideshow is displayed Button operation The keypad Web Remote on the in web browser projector software The remote control ENTER INPUT ENTER Functions Displays thumbnail These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed NOTE It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed e When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME the last slide of the presentation will be held on screen till the ENTER button on the remote control or Web Remote Control or INPUT button on the projector is pushed 83 PC LESS Presentation continued You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration Configure the Slideshow items in the Thumbnail 1 RETURN Returns to the thumbnail mode SLIDESHOW SELEC 2 PLAY Play the Slideshow PLAY EXECUTE 3 START Set the beginning number of the STOP Hio Slideshow AY MODE one THE 4 STOP Set the end number of the Slideshow 5 INTERVAL Set the interval time of the Slideshow It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something like several seconds because it may take more than several seconds to read and display an image file if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many files are stored i
150. data it is strongly recommended to check that the new dada can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection 24123 e If you change a network adapter on your computer make a new profile data for the adapter 33 1 9 Profile data continued 1 9 3 Editing Profile data If necessary the profile data can be edited on the Manual Configuration screen 423 1 Select the Profile and select one of the data listed in the window n Prajector 1 192 168 1 101 100a aaa PM 2 CI ick the Ed it a Projet bor 2 IA 168 1 10 ILOUR oe PM Prgjector d Dee 103 1 103 LL a0 20S 2 2124 Ph Boole bo profi C conige Molwn Settings Mirua 3 The Edit profile screen will come up 4 Edit the information required to be revised If you want to clear all information in the Botana i roii window click the Clear dept E Medic ate 5 Click the OK after the editing is completed Caw r If you don t want to store it click the Cancel Mee fare Projector tings 6 The edited profile data is stored and shown wee in the profile list with the new date created information if you click the OK NOTE When you edit a profile data it is strongly recommended to check that the edited data can work properly by selecting the data at the Profile connection 2423 34 1 9 Profile data continued 1 9 4 Registering My Connection One of the profile data which is oft
151. de for the blank screen The blank screen is a screen for the temporarily blanking feature 428 It is displayed by pressing the BLANK button on the remote control MyScreen ORIGINAL BLUE WHITE amp BLACK MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item 22149 ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen BLUE WHITE BLACK Plain screens in each color e To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes Using the A V buttons switches the mode for the start up screen The start up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an unsuitable signal is detected MyScreen ORIGINAL OFF eee MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item 449 START UP ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen OFF Plain black screen e To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the BLANK screen above after several minutes If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL the plain black screen is instead used e When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in the SECURITY menu 72 the START UP is fixed to MyScreen continued on next page 48 ltem scription O O O MyScreen This item allows you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP screen Display the image you want to capture before executing
152. de is lowered with some functional restriction as below e When SAVING is selected the RS 232C communication control except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled STANDBY MODE while the projector is in the standby mode If the COMMUNICATION TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK BRIDGE all of the RS 232C commands are disabled 671 e When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE 146 is invalid and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode e When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT is invalid and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the standby mode While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the image signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to MONITOR OUT port 1 Choose a picture input port using A V pullons Choose STANDBY to select the picture Tat output in the standby mode MONITOR OUT 2 Select one of the COMPUTER IN ports using lt gt buttons Select OFF to disable the MONITOR OUT port for the input port or standby mode chosen in the step 1 e You cannot select COMPUTER IN 1 in step 1 and COMPUTER IN2 in step 2 and vice versa 45 NU D KO inner From the AUDIO menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the cursor button or the ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it accor
153. dialog doesn t appear proceed as follows 1 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 2 Enter E software setup exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive E on your computer you will need to replace E with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive If the software has been already installed Uninstallation will be done Click the Cancel button then uninstallation will be canceled If you uninstalled the software by miss operation please re install the software from first procedure 5 After a moment the Welcome dialog will appear P as shown on the right Press the Next wm the ia Wizard tar Thee bret Sheet ord pel call ES a oe pe cen 1o pornire cki Pm 1 2 Installing the LiveViewer continued 6 The License Agreement dialog appears If Leer besoin Meare you accept it select I accept the terms of the license agreement and press the Next 7 The Choose Destination Location dialog see appears Press the Next ap a e 1 Viu ay ue te baaa under the beer of thet Liseeee Agiria OF giie Dies al Dap oon epee go nat acep the tama of fhe ices agreement NOTE The C Program Files Projector Tools LiveViewer folder will be created and the program will be installed into that folder If i pak Haa Cancel Liivak heer alea iard Chongas Dasimah orca Teksi folder ane pup aal meiha Aker you wish to install to a different folder
154. ding to the following table ltem escription VOLUME Using the lt i gt buttons adjusts the volume Low amp High Using the A V buttons turns on off the built in speaker SPEAKER ON amp OFF When OFF is selected the built in speaker does not work While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the audio signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built in speaker of this projector However the built in soeaker does not work when SPEAKER is set to OFF 1 Choose a picture input port using the A V buttons Choose STANDBY to select the sound output in the standby mode 2 Select one of the AUDIO IN ports using lt P gt buttons Select X to mute the sound from the input port or in the standby mode chosen in the step 1 e In the AUDIO SOURCE window H symbolizes the audio signal from the HDMI port It can be selected only for the picture input from the HDMI port e Even if the projector is in the standby mode cooling fans may work and make noises when the built in speaker is in operation e C C Closed Caption is automatically activated when X is selected and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 480i 60 for COMPONENT COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu 53 AUDIO SOURCE
155. dity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and
156. dot near the battery cover at the bottom of the projector Turn the cover in the direction indicated OPEN to position one end of the slit on the cover with the dot using a coin or the like And then pick the cover up to remove it 4 Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out While prying it up put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder D Replace with a new battery of the specified type With the plus side facing up slide the battery under the claw of the spring fitting And press down on the battery until it snaps into place 6 Replace the battery cover in place then turn it in the direction indicated CLOSE to position the knob of the cover with the dot on the bottom case to fix the cover using a coin or the like AWARNING P Be careful of handling a battery as a battery can cause explosion cracking or leakage which could result in a fire an injury and environment pollution e Use only the specified and perfect battery Do not use a battery with damage such as a scratch a dent rust or leakage e When replacing the battery replace it with a new battery e When a battery leaked wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth If the leakage adhered to your body immediately rinse it well with water When a battery leaked in the battery holder replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly align
157. dure in 1 1 to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 2 2 Use the A V buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off If an incorrect PIN Code is input 3 times the menu will close 3 If you have forgotten your PIN code 3 1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed press and hold the RESET button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the button on the projector The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed e If there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Inquiring Code is displayed the projector will turn off 3 2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your PIN code will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page fe ltem scription O O O If this function is set to ON when the vertical angle of the projector or MIRROR setting at which the projector S E a is turned on is different than the previously recorded the ee ee TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed Se Rea oe and the projector will not display the input signal E e To display the signal again set this function OFF e After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm the lamp will turn off e Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition Detector function is on 1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR 1 1 Use the A
158. e 78 Full Screen mode 482 Slideshow mode 83 Supported storage media e USB memory USB memory type USB hard disk and USB card reader type NOTE USB readers adapters that have more than one USB slot may not work if the adapter is acknowledged as multiple devices connected e USB hubs may not work e USB devices with security software may not work e Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device 412 80 Supported format e FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 NOTE NTFS is not supported Supported file format e JPEG jpeg jog Progressive is not supported e Bitmap bmp 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported e PNG png Interlace PNG is not supported e GIF gif NOTE Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported CP X4021N CP X5021N 1024X768 CP WX4021N 1280 x 800 Some computers may not support 1280 x 800 e Files with a resolution smaller than 36x36 are not supported e Files with a resolution smaller than 100x100 may not be displayed e Some supported files may not be displayed e Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in the Thumbnail mode PC LESS Presentation continued Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in a USB storage device on the Thumbnail screen Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen If you wish you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode after you
159. e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN 136 setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port continued on next page 37 ltem escription O Using the 4 gt buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker Right Left H PHASE e This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a component video signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the horizontal size Small Large e This item can be selected only for a computer signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port e When this adjustment is excessive the picture may not be displayed correctly In such a case please reset the adjustment by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this operation e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A da
160. e excessive This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE wide angle focus whenever possible e When the projector is placed on the level about 4 this function may not work e When the projector is inclined to near 30 degree or over this function may not work well e This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR 174 is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT 26 Using the lt gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion Shrink the bottom of the image Shrink the top of the image e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well KEYSTONE When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE telephoto focus this function may be excessive This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE wide angle focus whenever possible e This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR 174 is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT 326 continued on next page 43 Item Description KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE ECO MODE MIRROR Using the A V buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion Shrink the top of the image Shrink the bottom of the image e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well e When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center this function m
161. e indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company The cooling fan is not operating Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan etc and then turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company Regarding the indicator lamps continued POWER indicator indicator indicator Description There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make Lighting confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again Blinking In Red Li a In Red ls there blockage of the air passage aperture ae e Is the air filter dirty In Red e Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 C If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please set FAN SPEED of SERVICE item in OPTION menu to HIGH 2159 It is time to clean the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean or Lighting Simultaneous change the air filter referring to the section Cleaning In Green blinking in Red and replacing the air filter After cleaning or changing the air filter please be sure to
162. e or injury e Use the lamp of the specified type only e If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens contact your local dealer or a service representative e Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use e Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage Regulatory Notices FCC Statement Warning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a part
163. e sure the power cable is not plugged in then allow the projector to cool sufficiently gt Use only the air filter of the specified type Do not use the projector without the air filter or the filter cover It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector gt Clean the air filter periodically If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire a burn or malfunction to the projector NOTE Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter e The projector may display the message such as the CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising Replacing the internal clock battery This projector has internal clock that uses a battery When the clock of the network function does not work correctly please try solution by replacement of the battery HITACHI MAXELL part number CR2032 or CR2032H 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently se 2 After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately slowly turn over the projector so that the bottom is facing 3 There is a raised dot near the battery cover at the bottom of the projector Turn the cover in the direction indicated OPEN to position one end of the slit on the cover with the dot using a coin or the like And then pick the cover
164. ector Control menu Select an item with the mouse Most of the items have a submenu Refer to the table below for details NOTE he setting value may not match with the actual value if the user changes the value manually In that case please refresh the page by clicking the Refresh button Controls the projector Item Description MAIN POWER Turns the power on off INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting BLANK ON OFF Turns Blank on off MUTE Turns Mute on off FREEZE Turns Freeze on off Controls the magnify setting MAGNIFY In some input signal sources it might stop Magnify even though it does not reach to maximum setting value MAGNIFY POSITION V Adjusts the vertical magnify position MAGNIFY POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal magnify position TEMPLATE Turns template on off MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data MY IMAGE DELETE _ Deletes MY IMAGE data 61 3 10 Projector Control Continued Item Description PICTURE BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting GAMMA Selects the gamma setting COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting COLOR Adjusts the color setting TINT Adjusts the tint setting SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting ACTIVE IRIS Selects the active iris setting MYMEMORY SAVE Saves the MyMemory data MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data IMAGE
165. ed when loading a battery e Do not work on a battery for example recharging or soldering e Keep a battery in a dark cool and dry place Never expose a battery to a fire or water e Keep a battery away from children and pets Be careful for them not to swallow a battery If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment e Obey the local laws on disposing a battery 93 Other care Inside of the projector In order to ensure the safe use of your projector please have it cleaned and inspected by your dealer about once every year Caring for the lens If the lens is flawed soiled or fogged it could cause deterioration of display quality Please take care of the lens being cautious of handling 4 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaning wipe Do not touch the lens directly with your hand Caring for the cabinet and remote control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe with gauze or a soft cloth If the projector is extremely dirty dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water and wipe lightly
166. en 00 and 99 will replace the xx 7 1 3 Process to connect the network Before connecting your computer and projector via a network make sure that the LAN port is selected as the input source on the projector Operating in the User s Manual Operating Guide Otherwise a connection cannot be established 1 3 1 Process overview An overview of the process to connect your computer and the projector via a network is shown below The LiveViewer allows you to skip some of the steps below to establish a network connection quickly and easily Selecting the network connection mode If My Connection is Wireless LAN selected Wired LAN My Connection SE bs eee method If Enter PassCode or Configure Manually Select From List is Select From List selected Manual configuration Profile If Profile or History is History selected Configure Network Settings Manually Configuring the network settings manually Confirming the connection to your destination NOTE Wireless LAN can be selected only when an access point to convert wireless LAN to wired LAN exists between your computer and the projector e Up to 30 computers can be simultaneously connected to the projector through a network 1 3 Process to connect the network continued 1 3 2 Starting the LiveViewer Start the LiveViewer in your computer taking one of the followings 1 Double click the LiveViewer i
167. en used can be registered as the My Connection profile data Once the data is registered all you need to do is to select the My Connection to connect to the network 412 1 Click the My Connection Sette the manual Goneection mathaei pou wouk ii to ua 2 The Add My Connection screen will come Bolena Diao u p Profle 2 L1 S0 2000 39 41 PM The currently selected profile data for the My a oe o _Micorraction Connection is shown with a check mark in a the list projector ms 160 1103 11 20 2009 SERAM Projector MEMELI RAON AALA PM 3 Select one of the profile data listed in the window and put a mark in the check box The data selected before is turned un marked i Bfr LO 100mMbos PC Ethemet Adapter m n A 1 r PEI Piim actor 4 Click the OK then the window is closed If you don t want to select a new one click the Cancel NOTE If you don t want to use the My Connection mark no data listed in the window and click the OK e In the list all profile data are shown no matter which network adapter is selected You can register a profile data that is not for currently selected network adapter as the My Connection profile data 35 1 9 Profile data continued Also you can register a profile data to My Connection when the network connection is established When it is established the Connection to Projector successful screen is displayed 130 If you wish to use the current connecti
168. end to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General 19 Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it unde
169. er valid for at least three years to give any third party for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution a complete machine readable copy of the corresponding source code to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange or c Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer in accord with Subsection b above The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For an executable work complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable However as a special exception the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distrib
170. er error Other Error If displaying this error please contact your dealer Schedule Execution Error Lamp Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting Filter Time Alarm Filter time over Alarm Time setting Transition Detector Transition Detector Alarm OPTION menu in the User s Alarm Manual Operating Guide When the projector is supplied with the power it works as below e If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL the projector s Cold Start power status changes from OFF to Standby state e If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING the projector s power status changes from Standby state to ON lamp is turned on LQSETUP menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide Authentication Failure The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community Schedule Execution error L55 Refer to Troubleshooting in the User s Manual Operating Guide for further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error 53 3 6 Alert Settings Continued The Alert Items are shown below Item Description Configures the time to alert Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm SNMP Trap Click the Enable check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts Send Mail Click the Enable check box to enable e mail alerts Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configures the subject line of the e mail to be sent f The length of the subject line
171. et RS 232C RS 232C cable External device Response limit time Response data eer eee A Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu set the waiting time for response data from an external device LQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide OFF 1s 2s 3s OFF 76 6 4 Transmission method Continued NOTE With using the HALF DUPLEX method the projector can send out 254 byte data as maximum at once e If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF the projector can receive the data from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously The OFF is selected as the default setting 6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time without monitoring response data from an external device With using this method the computer and an external device will send the data out of synchronization If it is required to synchronize them set the computer to make the synchronization NOTE In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting and receiving the data it may not be able to control an external device well depending on the processing status of the projector 7 A ONNA RUINS 7 1 E mail Alerts The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e mail addresses when
172. from the projector s one in the dialog for changing Network configuration If the connection is not available with the entered Network configuration a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration and then enter appropriate configuration NOTE If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued E Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Ar y u Suro OL want fo Onnmct the aoiectiod proyector e To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 30 e Not to connect click the No then the ej LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 14 20 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 3 Configuring manually After entering the Passcode 417 you are required to enter the network configuration manually if you use a Subnet mask other than Class A B or C L115 If you use the wired LAN go to 422 Wireless LAN The projector
173. gon To use the Web Control function you need to logon with your user name and password 147 Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Display the logon window as shown on the right TEETAR There are two options to display this window Using the LiveViewer FOA Connect your computer and the projector via Network using the LiveViewer 9 The server 192 168 1 10 at Web Server Authentication requires a username and password Then click the Web Control button on a l ey P j Warning This server is requesting that your username and the LiveViewer main menu M3 7 to password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection start the Web browser software User name E v Password Using Web browser software _ Remember my password Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network and then start Web browser Enter the projector s IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the example below and then press the Enter key or gt button Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and press the Enter key or click gt button 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK NOTE The language used
174. he J KEYSTONE in SETUP menu 144 PERFECT FIT Pressing the button displays the KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT dialog See the PERFECT FIT item in SETUP menu 444 e When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs from pre assigned modes above the display on the menu for the PICTURE MODE is CUSTOM Please refer to the GAMMA and COLOR TEMP L133 34 items in PICTURE menu e Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Using the lt gt buttons switches the picture mode The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP settings Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source CC CINEMA amp DYNAMIC amp BOARD BLACK DAYTIME WHITEBOARD BOARD GREEN GAMMA COLOR TEMP NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID 2 DEFAULT 3 LOW PICTURE MODE THIGH 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 5 Hi BRIGHT 2 2 MID 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 continued on next page 31 Item Description Using the lt gt buttons turns off on the Eco mode OMODE See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu 44 MIRROR Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for mirror status See the MIRROR item in SETUP menu 444 Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the RESET FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE l A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu Performing this item re
175. he MAGNIFY ON button to switch the dialog between magnifying area shifting with the triangles and magnification ratio adjustment with the magnifying glass icon The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its display condition is changed While the magnification is active the keystone distortion condition may vary It will be restored when the magnification is disabled Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is active This function is not available in the following cases The USB TYPE A port is selected as the input source Async signal in the range not supported is input There is no input signal 27 Temporarily freezing the screen FREEZE button 4 Press the FREEZE button on the remote control The FREEZE indication will appear on the screen however the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu 450 and the projector will go into the FREEZE mode which the picture is frozen To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal press the FREEZE button again e The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control buttons are pressed e f the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time the LCD panel might possibly be burned in Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for too long e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but
176. he batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place 1 Holding the hook part of the battery cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two AA batteries HITACHI MAXELL Part No LR6 or R6P according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place AWARNING P Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment e Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not use batteries of different types at the same time Do not mix a new battery with used one e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery e Keep a battery away from children and pets e Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery e Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place e If you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately e Obey the local laws on disposing the battery About the remote contro
177. he item without image stored cannot be selected e The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less MY IMAGE To switch the image displayed Use the A V buttons To return to the menu Press the lt button on the remote control To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector 1 Press the RESET button on the remote control while displaying an MY IMAGE T image to display the MY IMAGE DELETE IMAGE 1 DELETE menu Co 2 Press the button to perform to erase To stop erasing press the lt button Use the A buttons to turn the AMX Device Discovery on off AMX D D ee AMX Device When ON is selected the projector can be detected by controllers Discovery of AMX connected to the same network For the details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http www amx com as of Aug 2010 continued on next page 67 ltem scription O Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu Use A V buttons to select one of the following items then press gt or ENTER button to use the function If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while its image is projected the projector is occupied by the computer and access from any other computer is blocked Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and QUIT allow other computers to access the projector PRESENTER Select this item to display a dialog MODE Press button to choose OK in the dialog The Presenter mode is c
178. he transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed The Display mode will be the Single PC mode at first After that the last Display mode will be applied Stop button The image transmission is stopped NOTE The images may not be displayed on screen if the Start Stop buttons are clicked repeatedly e The primary image is displayed in multi display environment 37 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued Hold button The image on screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on screen You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen Display mode button L140 The button switches the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode Connect button The screen to select the connection mode is displayed Go to item 1 5 E14 Option button The option screen is displayed Web control button Starts the Web browser on your computer and displays Web control screen to control the projector and change various settings for the projector L445 Information button The version of the LiveViewer is displayed Close button The network is disconnected and the LiveViewer is closed Minimize button The main menu is closed and the LiveViewer icon is displayed on the task tray in your computer The displayed icon changes as shown below depending on the status of the LiveViewer If the icon is double cl
179. hem with the new ones 8 Combine the two parts to reassemble the filter unit Q Put the filter unit back into the projector continued on next page 91 Cleaning and replacing the air filter continued 1 0 Put the filter cover back into the place 1 1 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the A V cursor buttons then press the gt cursor or the ENTER the RESET button A dialog will appear 3 Press the cursor button to select the OK on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time NOTE Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter e The projector may display the message such as the CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising 92 Replacing the internal clock battery This projector has internal clock that uses a battery When the clock of the network function does not work correctly please try solution by replacement of the battery HITACHI MAXELL part number CR2032 or CR2032H 4 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow ae the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector has cooled adequately slowly turn over the projector so that the bottom is facing 3 There is a raised
180. hen authentication is required for this port Authentication 50 3 4 Port Settings Continued Item Description SNMP Port Configures the SNMP port Port open Click the Enable check box to use SNMP Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format e The address allows not only IP address but also domain Trap address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Download MIB file Downloads a MIB file from the projector Network Bridge Port Configures the Bridge port number Input the port number Except for 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up It is set to 9717 as the default setting Port Number Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu g1 3 5 Mail Settings Displays and configures e mail addressing settings Item Description Click the Enable check box to use the e mail function Send Mail Configure the conditions for sending e mail under the Alert Settings Configures the address of the mail server in IP format e The address allows not only IP address
181. hether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the
182. hi com au Hitachi Hong Kong Ltd 18 F Ever Gain Centre 28 On Muk Street Shatin N T HONG KONG Tel 852 2113 8883 Fax 852 2783 4178 gt htto www hitachi hk com hk Hitachi Sales Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 12 Jalan Kamajuan Bangi Industrial Estate 43650 Bandar Baru Bangi Selangor Darul Ehsan MALAYSIA Tel 60 3 8926 4168 Fax 60 3 8926 3013 gt http www hitachiconsumer com my Hitachi Home Electronics arc S Pte Ltd 438A Alexandra Road 01 01 02 Alexandra Technopark 119967 SINGAPORE Tel 65 6536 2520 Fax 65 6536 2521 gt http www hitachiconsumer com sg Hitachi Sales orp of Taiwan 2 Floor No 65 Nanking East Road Section 3 Taipei 104 TAIWAN Tel 886 2 2516 0500 Fax 886 2 2516 1501 gt htto www hsct com tw Hitachi Sales Thailand Ltd 994 Soi Thonglor Sukhumvit 55 Road Klongtonnua Vadhana Bangkok 10110 THAILAND Tel 66 2381 8381 98 Fax 66 2381 0210 2381 0021 gt htto www hitachi th com Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co Ltd 292 Yoshida cho Totsuka ku Yokohama 244 0817 JAPAN Tel 81 45 415 2625 Fax 81 45 866 5821 gt htto www hitachi co jp proj
183. his does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied oy Introduction 22 0000000n ue 3 FeatureS 0 0000 ee aes 3 Checking the contents of package 3 Part nameS s 4640s d ae se tee dd as 4 Setting UP 26 260 cee he we ween 7 Arrangement T Connecting with your devices 10 Connecting to a power supply 15 Using the security bar and slot 15 Remote contrOl 16 Installing the batteries 16 About the remote control signal 16 Changing the frequency of remote control signal 17 Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard 17 Power on off 000005 18 Turning on the power 18 Turning off the power 18 Operating 2 2088n nee 19 Adjusting the volume 19 Temporarily muting the sound 19 Selecting an input signal 19 Searching an input signal 21 Selecting an aspect ratio 21 Adjusting the projector s elevator 22 Adjusting the lens 23 Using the automatic adjustment feature 24 Adjusting the position 24 Correcting the distortion 25 Using the magnify feature 2 Temporarily freezing the screen 28 Temporarily blanking the screen 28 Using the menu function 29 EASY MENU 00005 31 ASPECT AUTO KEYSTONE D KEYSTONE KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT PICTURE MODE Eco
184. hrleistung in irgendeiner Form weder ausdr cklich noch stillschweigend Wir schlieRen in gesetzlich zulassigem Umfang jede Haftung f r Verluste irgendeiner Art einschlie lich jedoch nicht beschr nkt auf den Verlust von Daten Genauigkeit oder Kompatibilit t mit anderen Programmen durch die betreffende Software und oder die Verwendung der betreffenden Software aus DEU TSCH Acuerdo de licencia de usuario final para el software del proyector El software incluido en el proyector consta del numero plural de m dulos de software independientes y contamos con nuestro derecho de reproduccion y o los derechos de reproduccion de terceros para cada uno de los modulos del software El proyector tambi n utiliza modulos de software que hemos desarrollado y o producido Contamos con derechos de reproduccion y propiedad intelectual para cada uno de los software y elementos relacionados incluidos a titulo de ejemplo los documentos relacionados con el software Los derechos de arriba estan protegidos por la ley de derechos de reproduccion y otras leyes aplicables Y el proyector utiliza modulos de software con licencia como freeware en la GNU General Public License Version 2 y la GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 establecida por Free Software Foundation Inc EE UU o acuerdos de licencia para cada software Consulte los acuerdos de licencia de dichos modulos de software y otro software en la siguiente pagina Web Direccion de la
185. icense 7 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you 16 cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be torefrain entirely from distribution of the Program If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable underany particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended toapply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in othercircumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
186. icked the last type of the main menu will be shown on screen Connected Disconnected Not connected Hold 38 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 2 Displaying the status 1 Indicator The indicator shows the following status not established yet Ea OJ The network connection is established but OBa e the image transmissions on hold The network connection is established and Connected the images on the computer are being sent to the projector Discsnnecded The network connection to the projector is disconnected 2 Status Display in Multi PC mode The icon is displayed at the right end of the Display mode buttons One of the following icons to inform which quarter screens are used will be shown 39 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued 2 1 3 Switching the display mode The LiveViewer has the Single PC mode and Multi PC mode The modes can be switched on the main menu 1 Click the amp button on the main menu The buttons below are displayed Status Display 2 Select from to buttons and click it Switching to the Single PC mode Your image is displayed on full screen Switching to the Multi PC mode Your image is displayed on a quarter screen identified in the button 3 The projector screen is switched to the mode selected above and the transmission of your computer image will be started to display your image on the screen 4 The icon amp on the m
187. icular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC Federal Communication Commission equipment provided that the following conditions are met Some cables have to be used with the core set Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection For cables that have a core only at one end connect the core to the projector CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For the Customers in CANADA NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Warranty And After Service Unless seen any abnormal operations mentioned with the first paragraph of WARNING in this manual when a problem occurs with the equipment first refer to the Troubleshooting section of the Operating Guide and run through the suggested checks If t
188. ific date No 1 has priority over Specific date No 2 and so on e Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events L58 81 7 3 Event Scheduling Continued Schedule Settings Q55 Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Schedule Settings on the main menu and select the required schedule item For example if you want to perform the command every Sunday please select the Sunday Click the Enable check box to enable scheduling Enter the date month day for specific date scheduling Click the Apply button to save the settings After configure the time command and parameters click the Register to add the new event 8 Click the Delete button when you want to delete a schedule 4 5 6 T There are three types of scheduling 1 Daily Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day 2 Sunday Saturday Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a specified day of the week 3 Specific date Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time NOTE In standby mode the POWER indicator will flash green for approx 3 seconds when at least 1 Power ON schedule is saved e When the schedule functio
189. images will be displayed Q Stop button The image transmission is stopped Hold button The image on the projector s screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on the screen You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen Option button The Options window is displayed Minimize button The Floating menu is closed and the icon reappears in the Windows notification area NOTE If you click the Start capture button and or Stop button repeatedly images may not be displayed on the screen 87 USB Display continued Options window If you select the Option button on the Floating menu the Options window is displayed Settings About 88 Optimize Performance Transmission speed Image quality C Keep PC resolution Optimize Performance The LiveViewer Lite for USB captures screenshots in JPEG data and sends them to the projector The LiveViewer Lite for USB has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the tra
190. ing server addresses 3 4 Port Settings Go js a BE i ie ae a a pm fa seai a Pt settings fefeort Giri Perm Pe Pom r r aa a Bore i bire fen bee Rete Corres Peed Pert Mall wriin _ Displays and configures communication port settings Item Description Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 23 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures command control port 1 Port 23 Authentication Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9715 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures command control port 2 Port 9715 Authentication PJLink Port Port 4352 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 4352 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the PJLink port Port 4352 Authentication My Image Port l l Port 9716 Configures the My Image Port Port 9716 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9716 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Authentication Messenger Port i Port 9719 Configures the Messenger Port Port 9719 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9719 Click the Enable check box w
191. ing the lt gt buttons and adjust the level using the A V buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern gt Gray scale of 9 steps t Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern Gray scale of 9 steps except the darkest in the left end If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern use the equalizing adjustment bar 1 The darkest tone at the left end of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar e Lines or other noise might appear on the oo screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction continued on next page 33 pS ltem escription O O O O O O Using the A V buttons switches the color temperature mode 1HIGH amp 1CUSTOM 2MID 2 CUSTOM amp amp 6 CUSTOM 3 LOW 2 2 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 3 CUSTOM 2 2 5 CUSTOM 5 Hi BRIGHT 2 amp 4 CUSTOM 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the gt button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected mode ENTERS TEST PATTERN COLOR TEMP OFFSET adjustments change the color intensity on the whole tones of the test pattern GAIN adjustments mainly affect
192. int at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the V A button then press the button 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 5 Press the gt button to select OK on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time ACAUTION P Do not touch any inner space of the projector while the lamp is taken out NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp 12 Replacing the lamp continued AN HIGH VOLTAGE AN HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE AAWARNING P The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws e For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US e For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information ask your dealer e If
193. ion cables If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables it can cause a fire or electrical shock Do not apply too much heat pressure or tension to the power cord and cables If the power cord or cables is damaged exposed or broken core wires etc contact your dealer e Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables Also do not place a spread cover etc over them because this could result in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or cables e Do not pull the power cord and cables When connecting and disconnecting the power cord or cables do it with your hand holding the plug or connector e Do not place the cord near the heater e Avoid bending the power cord sharply e Do not attempt to work on the power cord Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury The battery may explode if not handled properly e Keep the battery away from children and pets If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment e Do not allow the battery in a fire or water e Avoid fire or high temperature environment e Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers e Keep the battery in a dark cool and dry play e Do not short circuit the battery e Do not recharge disassemble or solder the battery e Do not give the battery a physical impact e Use only the battery
194. is carried since the license agreement following is established by third party other than us Because the program the software module is licensed free of charge the program is provided as is without warranty of any kind either expressed or implied to the extent permitted by applicable law And we do not take any responsibility or compensate for loss of any kind including but not limited to loss of data loss of accuracy or loss of compatibility with interface between other programs by the software concerned or and use of the software concerned to the extent permitted by applicable law ENGLISH Accord de licence d utilisateur final pour le logiciel du projecteur Le logiciel de ce projecteur est compose de plusieurs modules logiciels ind pendants avec des droits d auteurs nous appartenant et ou appartenant a des tiers pour chacun desdits modules logiciels Le projecteur utilise egalement des modules logiciels que nous avons mis au point et ou produits Nous d tenons galement des droits d auteur et de propri t intellectuelle pour chacun desdits logiciels et des elements connexes y compris mais sans s y limiter pour les documents relatifs aux logiciels Les droits susmentionne s sont prot g s par la l gislation sur le copyright et d autres lois applicables Et le projecteur utilise les modules de logiciel accord s en licence en tant que logiciel libre sous GNU General Public License Version 2 et GNU Lesser General Public
195. ive The CD ROM is designed for computer use only NEVER INSERT THE CD ROM INTOA NON COMPUTER CD PLAYER Inserting the CD ROM into an incompatible CD drive may produce a loud noise which in turn MAY RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE e After using CD ROM please put it into CD case and keep it Please keep the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity environment NOTE The information in the CD ROM is subject to change without notice Please check our website where you may find the latest information for this projector L19 e No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD ROM e All or Any part of the information in the CD ROM must not be copied reproduced or republished without notice to our company Specifications Item Specification Product name Liquid crystal projector CP X4021N CP X5021N 786 432 pixels 1024 horizontal x 768 vertical CP WX4021N 1 024 000 pixels 1280 horizontal x 800 vertical Liquid Crystal Panel Lamp 245 w UP 16 W mono BW Power supply 4100 120 V 4 0 A AC220 240 V 2 0 A Rated current AC100 120 V 380 W AC220 240 V 360 W consumption range 401 W x 103 H x 318 D mm Size Not including protruding parts Refer to figure F 5 at the back of this manual Weight mass approx 4 6 kg COMPUTER IN1 D sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPUTER IN2 H V G
196. izontal size will be automatically adjusted eee The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog 9 Beis will be displayed 6 To revert back to the previous resolution without saving changes move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the lt or ENTER button The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the previous resolution e For some pictures this function may not work well 42 Ss U gt men a SELECT From the SETUP menu items shown in the table saene below can be performed a PPUT KEYSTONE 0 Select an item using the 4 cursor buttons and rue Bo press the cursor button or ENTER button to sare execute the item Then perform it according to the cpp ed following table lt i e ltem escription Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone distortion due to the forward backward setup angle by itself This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu When the slant of the projector is changed execute this function again e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well e When V INVERT or H amp V INVERT is selected to the MIRROR item in the SETUP menu if the projector screen is inclined or angled downward this function may not work correctly ete e When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE telephoto focus this function may b
197. jector The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric Projector Name characters Only alphabets numbers and following symbols can be used amp lt gt h and space Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP sysLocation SNMP The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used Configures the contact information to be referred to when using SNMP The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the projector AMX D D from the controllers of AMX connected to the same network For the AMX Device Discovery details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http www amx com Click the Apply button to save the settings sysContact SNMP NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu e If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before sett
198. l FA htto av hitachi com projector index htm AFS 7E 3 Oo Chol SaS Aretol US SS Melo Lel e gjoja 2a Soll Het AAS Se Cts Hol aa75 S 4 AEE O SrO a x A Holaxe 4 oa Proda ASS HEHA Le HS PPAS AHE WAPE od EMA AHHA S onr Az JEL HAEL EP Ss mea ATED GS e Faz ASO pe a 42H 50 S SSS EHE HoA OY St BAIA EE SAA FS ol YE Ide HSE ch E SAE AS Hgo ass Se wjolAicioley AN Sata Ae FE CHE EPIASS Aas clelmolA So Sey BA olol x HS 5 ATEA J HE AIEA ASCs lst eA Hah Wels x FL ENSAI LAHE 10 sto Slutanvandarlicensavtal for projektorns programvara Programvaran i projektorn bestar av flera olika oberoende programvarumoduler och var upphovsratt och eller tredje parts upphovsratter existerar for var och en av dessa programvarumoduler Projektorn har aven programvarumoduler som har utvecklats och eller skapats Var upphovsratt och intellektuell egendom existerar for var och en av sadana programvaror och relaterade foremal inklusive men inte begransat till programvarans relaterade dokument Ovanstaende rattigheter skyddas av upphovsrattslag och andra tillampliga lagar Projektorn anvander programvarumoduler som ar licensierade som gratisprogram enligt GNU General Public License Version 2 och GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 utvecklade av Free Software Foundation Inc USA eller licensavtal for varje programvara Se f ljande webbsida for licensavtal for s dana programvarumoduler och andra programvaror Webbsid
199. l signal The remote control works with the projector s remote sensor This projector has a remote sensor on the front The sensor senses the signal within the following range when the sensor is active 60 degrees 30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor within 3 meters about 5 S SS SS SSS J x NOTE The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly attempt to make the signal reflect e The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector Class 1 LED so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block the remote control s signal to the projector e The remote control may not work correctly if strong light such as direct sun light or light from an extremely close range such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp shines on the remote sensor of the projector Adjust the position of projector avoiding those lights Changing the frequency of remote control signal The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal frequency Mode 1 NORMAL and Mode 2 HIGH If the remote control does not function properly attempt to change the signal frequency In order to set the Mode please keep pressing the combination of two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds 1 Set to Mode 1 NORMAL VOLUME and RESET buttons 2 Set to Mode 2 HIGH M
200. lects the input from VIDEO port e SLIDESHOW Selects the input from USB TYPE A and starts a Slideshow e MY IMAGE Displays the MY IMAGE menu E67 MY BUTTON e MESSENGER Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on off Messenger Function in the User s Manual Network Guide When there is no transferred text data to display the message NO MESSENGER DATA appears e INFORMATION Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION INPUT_INFORMATION 463 NETWORK_INFORMATION 70 or nothing e AUTO KEYSTONE Performs automatic keystone distortion correction G43 e MY MEMORY Loads one of adjustment data stored 135 When more than one data are saved the adjustment changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed When no data is saved in memory the dialog No saved data appears When the current adjustment is not saved to memory the dialog as shown in the right appears lf you want to keep the current adjustment please press the gt button to exit Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the current adjusted condition continued on next page al ltem scription e ACTIVE IRIS Changes the active iris mode e PICTURE MODE Changes the PICTURE MODE 04831 e FILTER RESET Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue L456 e TEMPLATE Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE item 152 appear or disappear e AV MUTE Turns the picture and audio on off e RESOLUTION Turns on off the RESOLUT
201. linking In Red or Lighting In Red Continued on next page discre tionary Lighting In Red Blinking In Red rned The projector is cooling down discre tionary Blinking In Red Please wait Lighting Turned Turned The projector is in an on state In Green off off Ordinary operations may be performed Blinking Turned Tu In Orange off off The projector is cooling down A certain error has been detected Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking and then perform the proper measure using the item descriptions below The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again e Is there blockage of the air passage aperture e Is the air filter dirty e Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 C If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please change the lamp referring to the section Replacing the lamp The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp cover After performing any needed maintenance turn the power on again If the sam
202. lke softwaremodules en andere software Webpagina http av hitachi com projector index html Neem contact op met uw dealer voor inlichtingen betreffende software waarop een gebruiksrecht is gevestigd Raadpleeg de gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten van alle software op de volgende pagina s 15 en gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten van alle software op de webpagina voor meer details over de gebruiksvoorwaarden enz Aangezien de volgende gebruiksrechtovereenkomsten niet door ons maar door derden werden opgesteld zijn ze oorspronkelijk opgesteld in de Engelse taal Omdat het programma de softwaremodule een gratis gebruiksrecht heeft wordt het programma zo ter beschikking gesteld zonder enige garantie uitdrukkelijk noch impliciet voor zover bij wet toegestaan En we aanvaarden geen aansprakelijkheid noch betalen een schadevergoeding uit voor eventueel verlies inclusief maar niet beperkt tot verlies van gegevens nauwkeurigheid of compatibiliteit met interface tussen andere programma s door de respectieve software en of het gebruik van de respectieve software voor zover bij wet toegestaan NEDER LANDS Contrato de licen a do utilizador final para o software do projector Software no projector consiste no numero plural de modulos de software independentes e ai residem os nossos direitos de autor e ou direitos de autor de terceiros para cada um desses m dulos de software O projector tamb m utiliza m dulos de software que desenvolvemos e o
203. lopers Less of an advantage over competing non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and
204. lus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery e Keep a battery away from children and pets e Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery e Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place e If you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately e Obey the local laws on disposing the battery ENGLISH ral Arrangement Refer to tables T 1 and T 2 at the back of this manual as well as the following to determine the screen size and projection distance Projector to c 4 q Projector bottom Era x V Screen size Projection distance from the projector s end Screen height AAWARNING P Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions Install the projector in a stable horizontal position e Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the manufacturer Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used e For special installation such as ceiling mounting be sure to consult your dealer beforehand Specific mounting accessories and services may be required gt Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things gt Do not place the projector whe
205. lution up to UXGA 1600X1200 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical e If you connect this projector and a notebook computer you need output the display to an external monitor or output simultaneously to the internal display and an external monitor Consult the computer s manual for the setting e Depending on the input signal the automatic adjustment function of this projector may take some time and not function correctly Note that a composite sync signal or sync on green signal may confuse the automatic adjustment function of this projector 441 If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly you may not see the dialog to set the display resolution In such a case use an external display device You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display resolution continued on next page 11 Connecting with your devices continued Computer LAN RS 232C Access A J point 64 USB TYPE E o 178 7 ia 055 an LAN 464 l V storage AUDIO IN3 device AUDIO IN1 R REMOTE CONTROL eceee CONTROL 61 AUDIO IN2 L COMPONENT CF Pr NOTE If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port use a USB exten
206. m E4170 v Messenger allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network 0172 v Network Bridge allows you to control an external device through the projector from a computer L474 NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment e Microsoft Internet Explorer Windows Windows Vista and Aero are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation e JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in a Japan the United States of America and other countries and areas IILink All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners ae 1 Connection to the Network ccccessesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseneseneees 4 1 1 System requirements cccccsececsececcececcececeseeseueeceseeeceeeecseeeeaeeeeaeessaeeees 4 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation siciievsvicsaisat
207. mat component video source supporting C C feature to utilize this function It may not work properly depending on equipment or signal source In this case please turn off the Closed Caption DISPLAY Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using A V buttons AUTO ON amp OFF ee AUTO Closed Caption automatically displays when the volume is muted ON Closed Caption is on OFF Closed Caption is off e The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active e The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue narration and or sound effects of a television program or other C C video sources The Closed Caption availability is depending upon Closed Caption broadcaster and or content MODE Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using A V buttons CAPTIONS TEXT CAPTIONS Display Closed Caption TEXT Display Text data which is for additional information such as news reports or a TV program guide The information covers the entire screen Not all of the C C program has Text information CHANNEL Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using A V buttons 18220304 Channel 1 primary channel language Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 The channel data may vary depending on the content Some channel might be used for secondary language or empty I I IN 53 ORION Taner From the OPTION menu items shown in the
208. matted as follows Subject line lt Mail title gt lt Projector name gt Text lt Mail text gt Date lt Failure Warning date gt Time lt Failure Warning time gt IP Address lt Projector IP address gt MAC Address lt Projector MAC address gt 19 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol enables to manage the projector information which is a failure or warning status from the computer on the network The SNMP management software will be required on the computer to use this function NOTE It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network administrator e SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor the projector via SNMP SNMP Settings 50 Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Download MIB file to download a MIB file NOTE To use the downloaded MIB file specify the file by your SNMP manager 5 Click the Enable check box to open the SNMP Port Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure Warning occurs NOTE A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration settings have been changed Click the Ne
209. mitting and receiving data at the same time e HALF DUPLEX is selected as the default setting e If you select HALF DUPLEX check the setting of the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME 62 continued on next page 61 Item Description RESPONSE LIMIT TIME Select the time period to wait for receiving response data from other device communicating by the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF DUPLEX through the CONTROL port OFF 1s 28s 3s ee OFF Select this mode if it is not required to check the responses from the device that the projector sends data to In this mode the projector can send out data from the computer continuously SERVICE COMMUNICATION 1s 2s 3s Select the time period to keep the projector waiting for response from the device that the projector sends data to While waiting the response the projector does not send out any data from the CONTROL port e This menu is available only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE and the HALF DUPLEX is selected for the TRANSMISSION METHOD 61 e OFF is selected as the default setting STACK Selecting this item displays the STACK menu For more information about this menu check our web site GJUser s Manual concise continued continued continued on next page 62 ltem scription O O O INFORMATION Selecting this item displays a dialog titled NPUT_INFORMATION It shows the information about the current inp
210. move the cursor to the first line and use the lt P gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed atta After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 6 above 8 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous name without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button Using the A V cursor buttons switches the mode for the template screen Press the cursor or the ENTER button to display the selected template and press the lt cursor button to close the displayed screen The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed 58 TEMPLATE TEST PATTERN DOT LINE1 amp DOT LINE2 DOT LINE3 2 2 STACK MAP2 MAP1 CIRCLE2 CIRCLE1 DOT LINE4 You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when MAP 1 or MAP2 is selected To invert or scroll the map display the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears continued on next page 52 ltem scription The C C is the function that displays a transcript or dialog of the audio portion of vola a video files or other presentation or other relevant sounds It is required to have NTSC format video or 480i 60 for
211. n the same directory 6 PLAY MODE Select the Slideshow mode ONE TIME Play the Slideshow one time ENDLESS Play the Slideshow endless NOTE The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the playlist txt file that is stored in the storage media If the file is not existed it is generated automatically e The settings for the START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE are saved to the Playlist e If the storage media is under the write protection or the playlist txt is the read only type file it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow 84 PC LESS Presentation continued Playlist The Playlist is a DOS format text file which decides the order of displayed still image files in the Thumbnail or Slideshow The playlist file name is playlist txt and it can be edited on a computer It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC LESS Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured Example of playlist txt files START setting STOP setting INTERVAL setting PLAY MODE setting img001 jpg img002 jpg 600 img003 jpg 700 rot1 img004 jpg SKIP img005 jpg 1000 rot2 SKIP The playlist txt file contains the following information Each piece of information requires to be separated by and at the end of each line 1st line START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings 84 2nd line and after file name interval
212. n is confirmed wy TEXT PASSWORD continued on next page 19 ltem scription O OO O O 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the gt or ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu 2 Use the A V buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu to select on or off MY TEXT ON OFF DISPLAY When it is set ON the MY TEXT will be displayed on the START UP screen and the INPUT _ INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the SERVICE menu is chosen e This function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to the OFF 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT WRITING and press the gt button The MY TEXT WRITING dialog will be displayed 2 The current MY TEXT will be displayed on the first 3 lines If not yet written the lines will be blank Use the A W lt gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen MY TEXT and press the ENTER or INPUT button WRITING 1 character or all characters will be erased The MY TEXT can be input up to 24 characters on each line 3 To change an already inserted character press the A V button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the
213. n is used the power cord must be connected to the projector and the outlet The schedule function does not work when the breaker in a room is tripped The power indicator will lights orange or green when the projector is receiving AC power 82 7 3 Event Scheduling Continued Date Time Settings 158 The Date Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Date Time Settings on the main menu and configure each item Refer to item 3 8 Date Time Settings 158 for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The battery for the built in clock may be dead if the clock loses time even when the date and time have been set correctly Replace the battery by following the instructions on replacing the battery LQiReplacing the internal clock battery in the User s Manual concise e The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time 83 7 4 Command Control via the Network You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS 232C commands Communication Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control TCP 23 Network Control Port1 Port 23 TCP 9715 Network Control Port2 Port
214. n is working 45 not work Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu NETWORK The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off BRIDGE Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE aai o item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu not wor Schedule function The SAVING function is working 45 does not work Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu When the Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector projector is is working properly connected to the If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network network it powers there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs off and on as within the network as explained below described below There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network Paea Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables POWER indi This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs indicator blinks in orange a Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector few times as well as the other network devices Check the network connection and remove the loop by Goes into disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one standby mode connecting cable between two hubs Video files cannot The LiveViewer has been intentionally or accidentally be played properly forced to shut down on a computer DirectDraw or Direct3D has been disabled on your Windows onwhich the Please refer to the Microsoft Help and Suppo
215. n may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu R459 AUTO button Adjusting the position 4 Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is indicated The POSITION indication will appear on the screen 2 Use the A gt cursor buttons to adjust the picture position When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation To complete this operation press POSITION button again Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds POSITION button e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal some image such as an extra line may appear at outside of the picture e When this function is performed on a video signal or s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu E2136 setting It is not possible to adjust wnen OVER SCAN is set to 10 e If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen the displayed picture does not move its position but the menu does e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A USB TYPE B or HDMI port 24 Correcting the distortion To correct the distortion of projected screen you can select one of three options AUTO MANUAL and PERFECT FIT AUTO performs the automatic vertical keystone KEYSTONE correction 2143 a MANUAL
216. naraem ABTOPCKUMU NpaBaMu n npaBamn Ha VHTeNNeKTyaNbHy O COOCTBEHHOCTb B OTHOWEHUN kaxgoro nogo6Horo nporpammHoro ObecneYyeHUA N CBA3AHHbIX C HNM MaTepnanoB BKNIOYAA B YACTHOCTN DOKYMeHTaLIMIO NO NporpamMMHOMy o6ecneyeHnio Bbiweyka3aHHbie NpaBa 3alMLaloTCA 3aKOHOM OO aBTOpCKNX NpaBax n Apyrumu NDUMEHUMbIMU 3aKOHaMN poeKkTop Takxke ncnonb3yeT MOgynn NporpaMMHOro oOecneyeHuaA pacnpoctpaHAemble 6ecnnaTHo B CooTBeTcTBUN C GNU General Public License Version 2 n GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 ucnonb3yemMbiMu KOoMnaHven Free Software Foundation Inc CLA nnn nuyeH3svoHHbimMu cornawenamn Ha Kaxgoe NporpamMHoe ObecneveHve JIVLEH3MOHHbIe COMMaWeHUA gna NOAOOHbIX MOgyne NporpamMMHoro oOecneyeHuaA n Apyroro nporpaMMHoro ObecneyeHuA NpvBeAeHbI Ha cnenyioe Beo CTpaHULe Agpec Be6 cTpaHuupi http av hitachi com projector index html NHpopmayno O NUWEH3UPOBaHHOM NporpaMMHOM o6ecneyeHnn MOXKHO NONYYNTb y Qunepa MlogpoOuble gaHHbie NO ycnoBnam NnyeH3npoBaHna n gpyrum Bonpocam MpPNBEeAEHbI B NVULEH3VOHHbIX cCormmaeHnax NO KaAXAOMY nporpamMHomy obecneyeHui0 NPUBEAeHHbIX Ha CNeAYrOLUX cTpaHnnyax 15 N MULEH3MOHHbIX cornaLteHnax NO kaxgoMmy nporpaMMHomy o6ecneyeHnio NPVBEAeEHHbIX Ha BeO cTpaHuue Mockonbky cnegyoyne NNUEH3NOHHbIe cornawe kna npegocTaBNeEHb i TPETbNMN CTOpPOHAMN NPUBOAATCA UX OPUMHaNbHbIe TEKCTbI HA AHIMUMCKOM A3bIKe lockonbky nporpamMa Mmogynb nporpammHoro ObecneYyeHuA NpegoctTaBnAeTca OecnnaTHOo o
217. nd cautions in the manuals or on the product gt Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product NOTE In this manual unless any comments are accompanied the manuals means all the documents provided with this product and the product means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector Contents LU LU ie aC rc eee eee ee eee eee 2 Connecting power supply 8 Entries and graphical symbols explanation 2 Turning on the pOWe 0cccee 8 Important safety instruction cceeeeeee 2 Adjusting the projector s elevator 9 Regulatory notices cccccccseeees 3 Displaying the picture 08 10 About Electro Magnetic Interference 3 Turning off the DOWETD ccceceeeeeeees 11 About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 4 Replacing the lamp c cccee 12 Contents Of packag ccceeceeeeees 4 Cleaning and replacing the air filter 14 Preparations oscars e cteeedscetivesndlnaecdarkes 5 Replacing the internal clock battery 16 Loading batteries into the remote control 5 Using the CD manual 17 Arrangement ccccscccsseeesseeeneeeees 6 Specifications cccccseeceeeeeee 18 Connecting with your devices 7 Troubleshooting Warranty and after service 19 ENGLISH ral First of all Entries a
218. nd graphical symbols explanation The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product as follows for safety purpose Please know their meanings beforehand and heed them AAWARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death ACAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Important safety instruction The followings are important instructions for safely using the product Be sure to follow them always when handling the product The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector AAWARNING P Never use the product in or after an abnormality ex giving off smoke smelling strange took a liquid or an object inside broken etc If an abnormality should occur unplug the projector urgently gt Situate the product away from children and pets gt Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt gt Unplug the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the time being gt Do not open or remove any portion of the product unless the manuals direct it For internal maintenance leave it to your dealer or their service personnel gt Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the manufacturer gt Do not modify the projector or accessories gt Do not let
219. nd other countries e Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights raJLink in Japan the United States of America and other countries and All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners 1 areas e Blu ray Disc is a trademark HITACHI Read this Safety Guide first Inspire the Next Projector User s Manual Safety Guide Thank you for purchasing this projector NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transmission or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express written authority About The Symbols Various symbols are used in this manual the user s manual and on the product itself to ensure correct usage to prevent danger to the user and others and to prevent property damage The meanings of these symbols are described below It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents This symbol indicates information that if ignored could AN WARNING possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling This symbol indicates information that if ignored could AN CAUTION result possibly in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling Typical Symbols A This symbol indicates an additional warning including cautions An illustrati
220. nection is not available with the entered Network configuration a warning dialog shown to the right will be displayed Click the OK to return to the dialog for changing the Network configuration and then enter appropriate configuration NOTE If a Network configuration to connect to the projector has been added on the computer the added Network configuration will be erased once the application software is closed E Are you sure you want to connect the selected projector The message is appeared when the wireless adapter you selected is already used for another network connection Art POL SUG POL want ho conmact the Aoki phajcha e To connect click the Yes Proceed to item 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 130 e Not to connect click the No then the cw j e LiveViewer main menu is displayed even though the network is not established Click 2 on the main menu to go back to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 114 29 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination 1 8 1 Connection and transmission When the network connection is established Canmnchon to Projector successtul the Connection to Projector successful screen Projector name PRI_OL2S4S6r0Gab SGSP Ayen E E S ees Make sure that the right projector that you want EIEE EAEE to send your image to is selected by checking the projector name and IP address shown in the screen e To
221. ned for continuous use of long time In the case of continuous use for 6 hours or more or use for 6 hours or more every day even if it isn t continuous or repetitious use the lifetime may be shortened and these parts may need to be replaced even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using e Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user s manuals may shorten the lifetimes of the consumables Before turning on the power make the projector cool down adequately After turning the projector off pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply make the projector cool down adequately Operation in a high temperature state of the projector causes a damage of the electrode and un lighting of the lamp Avoid strong rays Any strong ray such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting onto the remote control sensors could invalidate the remote control Avoid radio interference Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises e Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone transceiver etc around the projector About displaying characteristic The display condition of the projector such as color contrast etc depends on characteristic of the screen because the projector uses a liquid crystal display panel The display condition can differ from the display of CRT e Do not use a polarized screen It can cause red image Turn the power on off in right order
222. nged the files and the date of any change c You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If dentifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees ext
223. ns und oder dem Urheberrecht Dritter Der Projektor verwendet zudem durch uns entwickelte und oder produzierte Softwaremodule Fur jedes dieser Softwaremodule sowie deren Zubeh r einschlieBlich aber nicht beschr nkt auf die zur Software geh rigen Dokumente unterliegen dem Urheberrecht und dem geistigen Eigentumsrecht von uns Die obigen Rechte sind durch das Urheberschutzgesetz und anderes geltendes Recht gesch tzt Zudem verwendet der Projektor Softwaremodule die unter GNU General Public License Version 2 und GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 der Free Software Foundation Inc USA bzw unter den Lizenzvereinbarungen f r die einzelnen Softwaremodule als Freeware lizenziert sind Informationen zu den Lizenzvereinbarungen f r derartige Softwaremodule und sonstige Software finden Sie auf der folgenden Webseite URL http av hitachi com projector index html Wenden Sie sich bei Fragen zu Lizenzsoftware an Ihren Vertragsh ndler Detaillierte Informationen die den Lizenzbedingungen finden Sie in den Lizenzvereinbarungen der jeweiligen Software auf den folgenden Seiten M15 sowie den Lizenzvereinbarungen der jeweiligen Software auf der Webseite Da die folgenden Lizenzvereinbarungen durch Dritte festgelegt wurden sind sie im englischen Original wiedergegeben Da das Programm das Softwaremodul kostenfrei bereitgestellt wird erfolgt die Bereitstellung in gesetzlich zul ssigem Umfang ohne M ngelgew hr und ohne Gew
224. nsferred data is larger but the image quality is better Keep PC resolution If you remove the check mark from the Keep PC resolution box the screen resolution of your computer will be switched as follows and the display speed may be faster CP X4021N CP X5021N 1024X768 XGA CP WX4021N 1280 x 800 lf your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected NOTE When the resolution is changed the arrangement of icons on computer desktop screen may be changed About The version information of the LiveViewer Lite for USB IM elionelarelnrers Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number DT01171 Replacing the lamp 4 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted on a ceiling or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case of replacement by yourself follow the following proced
225. nssannets 55 3 8 Date Time Settings wrece cncsnsainedicentoeroaianlanatents docinneduassusierdeaesdntepaadeatinnameuccndnes 58 3 9 Security Settings cuticaseencansamredsaneteenedariiama enid ion ncoaised ceednensentensesatetennetcowstts 60 3 10 Projector Control Soeceencsnsapnetaceattorearaaianatened sidinieduaisusteatuetiaeteeadsatiolaamnuecniaes 61 3T Remote CONTON ie daccienesesendedocectcencccedianatamiadsomnedodsedinerabendsonneeanesnnonicentaaneees 67 3 12 Projector Status scsirscenspiasocdiertecsssccsaseuskenancadesiocodsdeasindsashhcbvansadldeseaediasencees 68 3 13 Network Restart a csisvincayiexinnsenasiecaeesceuecbiinecauedatseancvacenescctitaimmesnteatenaadiensimnas 69 4 My Image Function sssasnasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 70 9 MESSET FUNCIION scesscstsssacsesdeenanseasaceasenencnasanscenscesacnsauaatansaaie 72 6 Network Bridge Function cccceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeseneseneseneeeesens 74 6 1 Connecting devices wiccacisccsodancrcouushendbeausaaehiceduenaseaietetaecsaontideaiaceuratedodnned 74 6 2 Communication setup ssindeseenniazcesceosecadesatehdedtanucdoatsamontoussaeteaccicadesne dsenteses 75 6 3 Comm nication ON secszssh da tenedend cecoee sta tdeocedod4 ddeitemanas scntecticun snes teaneiaannrse a 75 6 4 Transmission method wwinicsiareincconcsndavidonetasaniduanebiatsenantheuesbietaanianiunneciaiuede 76 I EG ercct ats catdnccrs rrcolectaend dusts E O 76 p42 FOLLDUPLEX nepopisna eikeen ea asacan
226. ntal phase settings are not properly adjusted Pictures appear Adjust the focus using the focus ring and or H PHASE blurry using the menu function The lens is dirty or misty Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the lens When the projector is operating in Eco mode flickering may appear on screen Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to Some kind OFF in the SETUP menu Fi d en The OVER SCAN ratio is too big such as Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller flickeringor Excessive VIDEO NR Stripes appear Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu on screen The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the current input signal Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF continued on next page 101 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued f Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect The computer The computer cannot start up in the current hardware connected tothe configuration USB TYPE B port Disconnect the USB cable from the computer then of the projector reconnect it after starting up the computer does not start up The SAVING function is working 45 Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu RS 232C does The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is not work set to NETWORK BRIDGE Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu Network does The SAVING functio
227. o confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off perform the connection according to the following instructions Refer to the figures in subsequent pages Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to read User s Manual Network Guide too NOTE Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector e The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage requirements Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the following illustration e Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector When connecting a connector to a port make sure that the shape of the connector fits the port Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port Use the cables with straight plugs not L shaped ones as the input ports of the projector are recessed About Plug and Play capability e Plug and Play is a system composed of a computer its operating system and peripher
228. o a perda de dados perda de precisao ou perda de compatibilidade com a interface entre outros programas pelo software em questao e ou utilizagao do software em questao ate ao limite permitido pela lei aplicavel POR TUGUES Pra MLE Sin AA Ay N Re HLA RAB SS TILARA BRA RRIIAG RIRIKI SE ZARN EILEAR AE MHRA AAIR mA RNIB BIE MLR FAHER LAE AM Fl SS AAA A th REHAR F Free Software Foundation Inc U S I 3 89Y GNU General Public License Version 2 0 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 MBSA mW RENE RAR FREJ A BRAE AKRE EFRR REER FANFAN ESAT MD Wn tHE http av hitachi com projector index html RAGAH S REVA AFAKA AKFAR MAFA Bes HATER 15 PEREA NARAR EREIN CAF MFA I REA mIRE AMMAR IRI tele RHR FARAHAN AEEA AE FEA tE FRAT Se AEE AB BES RARE EEA AEEA FRK A ABARAT EAS EAE TINA CHER MIRF RAK Fa TERE NATASHA SRARA BARA RERE zA AIEA A5 ASA BHMA Alot Xt zgage AZ EMME OFF AHS SHAA AHP SEMN PER TA 4 SEEM Sse T fe AtHO SA EHC Zee c WAAN FH X He xI EFE AIEO OSCASSLIch est pE APES OYS SZ ERO HA BA Old S FS Ss BAe ata ats Of SAPS AAPA DE ALAA ARAPAHO EAH EE Pa lo gt Hegy Helse HAAHI JIE NS F7rest HS lof PoBect Est E I ealeE Free Software Foundation Inc OJ aA GFE GNU Gane Public License Version 2 2 GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 tE 4 aEEools Hola Alto QAH Ead ARS ATS Het ag AT EMO 280 7E ATDEDMOS BoJ AMA AHS che A Hol Z Hol
229. ock e Do not place the projector on an unstable slant or vibrant surface such as a wobbly or inclined stand e Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters e Do not place the projector in the side up position the lens up position or the lens down position e In the case of a ceiling installation or the like contact your dealer before installation 2 Disconnect the plug from the power outlet 9 Do not disassemble 9 WARNING Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit It could result in fire or burn Use special caution in households where children are present Do not touch about the lens air fans and ventilation openings during use or immediately after use to prevent a burn Take care of ventilation e Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such as walls e Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat e Do not place anything about the lens air fans and ventilation openings of the projector e Never block the air fan and ventilation openings e Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth etc e Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding Never look through the lens or openings when the lamp is on The powerful light could adversely affect vision Use special caution in households where children are present Use only the correct power cord and the c
230. oduced from the speaker move the microphone away from the speaker e This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone Microphone function e You can connect a dynamic microphone to the MIC port with a 3 5 mm mini plug In that case the built in speaker outputs the sound from the microphone even while the sound from the projector is output You can input line level signal to the MIC port from equipment such as wireless microphone Select HIGH in the MIC LEVEL item of the AUDIO menu when you input line level audio signal to the MIC port In the normal mode the volume of the microphone can be adjusted separately from the volume of the projector using the menu L446 47 In the standby mode the volume of the microphone is adjustable with the VOLUME buttons on the remote control in synchronization with the volume of the projector L419 Even when the sound of projector is set to mute mode by the AUDIO SOURCE function 146 the volume of the microphone is adjustable In both modes standby or normal the MUTE button on the remote control works on the sounds of the microphone and the projector 419 e This projector doesn t support plug in power for the microphone 14 Connecting to a power supply 4 Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC inlet of the projector 2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the outlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indica
231. of the accessories used e For special installation such as ceiling mounting be sure to consult your dealer beforehand 425410 0318222 T gt gt lo lolooaoal ainoo OOI GO RO DO S gt gt gt OO 1 382 16 11632 44411 75 40 continued on next page Arrangement continued 4 WARNING P Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things Such things when heated by the projector could result in a fire and burns e Do not place the projector on a metal stand gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used Oil may harm the product resulting in malfunction or falling from the mounted position gt Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet Getting the projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a fire and an electric shock and damage the projector e Do not place the projector near water such as in a bathroom kitchen or poolside e Do not place the projector outdoors or by the window e Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector 4 CAUTION P Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its internal temperature is too high Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock
232. ome Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise 32 bit version only v CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher v Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher When using the LiveViewer it is recommended that the display resolution of your computer is set to 1024 x 68 v Memory 512 MB or higher v Hard disk space 100 MB or higher v Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher v CD ROM drive NOTE The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL EQSETUP menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide e You can get the latest version of the LiveViewer and the latest information for this product from our website L7 e Depending on the specification of your computer the computer may slow down due to high CPU usage when the LiveViewer is running e The LiveViewer does not work on Windows Vista that is not updated to Service Pack 1 or later Please install the latest Service Pack on your Windows Vista 1 1 System requirements continued NOTE Referring to the manual of your computer or Windows select the following or a smaller display resolution for the computer CP X4021N CP X5021N 1024 x 768 XGA CP WX40
233. on setting for My Connection check in the box for the Register this setting to My Connection And then if it is okay to overwrite the present data for My Connection click the OK A new profile data will be created and it is registered as My Connection profile data ve you gure that you want to cieplay mages on the projector flogicter the avtting bo My Connection ver e NOTE If there are already 10 profile data the check box cannot be checked Please erase one of the existing profile data e The profile name for the stored data is assigned by the LiveViewer automatically The name will be shown at the right side of the check box 36 A NGAO RESAN 2 1 Using the LiveViewer When you get the connection between your projector and computer the LiveViewer main menu will be shown on the computer screen On the main menu you can configure settings and operate functions to send your images to the projector 2 1 1 Main menu and Operating buttons 1 Menu Type There are 2 type of the main menu Easy type and Advanced type which can be switched on screen e When the LiveViewer is started the last used type will be on screen e When the network connection is not established the Advanced type will be on screen Easy Type Advanced Type Q Status Display m JEJE EES E Switch to J Switch to Advanced type Easy type Indicator 2 Operating buttons Starting Capture button T
234. on is provided to clarify the contents This symbol indicates a prohibited action The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby the symbol to the left indicates that disassembly is prohibited This symbol indicates a compulsory action The contents will be clearly ze indicated in an illustration or nearby the symbol to the left indicates that the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet Safety Precautions WARNING Never use the projector if a problem should occur Abnormal operations such as smoke strange odor no image no sound excessive sound damaged casing or elements or cables penetration of liquids or foreign matter etc can cause a fire or electrical shock In such case immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from the power outlet After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped contact your dealer Never attempt to make repairs yourself because this could be dangerous e The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Use special caution for children and pets Incorrect handling could result in fire electrical shock injury burn or vision problem Use special caution in households where children and pets are present Do not insert liquids or foreign object Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock Use special caution in households where children are present If li
235. on the Web Control screen is the same as that of the OSD on the projector If you want to change it you need to change the OSD language on the projector SCREEN menu in the User s Manual Operating Guide 46 3 1 Logon Continued Below are the factory default settings for user name and password Username Password Administrator lt blank gt If you logon successfully the screen below will be displayed Main menu ee m d E Top Metwork Information 3 Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu 47 3 2 Network Information Displays the projector s current network configuration settings Projector Name Displays the projector name settings DHCP Displays the DHCP configuration settings IP Address Displays the current IP address Item Description Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Default Gateway Displays the default gateway DNS Server Address Displays the DNS server address MAC Address Displays the ethernet MAC address 48 3 3 Network Settings Displays and configures network settings Item Description IP Configuration Configures network settings DHCP ON Enables DHCP DHCP OFF Disables DHCP IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled Default Gateway Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled Configures the name of the pro
236. on will be lost by loading data If you want to keep the current adjustment please save it before performing a LOAD function e There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a moment when loading data This is not malfunction e You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON Please see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu 57 35 IWASE MONU From the IMAGE menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table ltem escription O O O O_O Using the A V buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio For a computer signal CP X4021N CP X5021N NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 E CP WX4021N NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 NATIVE OE ee For an HDMI signal CP X4021N CP X5021N NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 EEE ASPECT CP WX4021N NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 NATIVE ee For a video signal s video signal or component video signal CP X4021 CP X5021 4 3 16 9 14 9 i CP WX4021 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 NATIVE ee II For an input signal from the LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port or if there is no signal CP X4021N CP X5021N 4 3 fixed CP WX4021N 16 10 fixed e The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the over scan ratio Small
237. ong e There may be some noise and or the screen may flicker for a moment when an adjustment is made This is not a malfunction SHARPNESS Using the A V cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode PRESENTATION THEATER amp OFF 7 PRESENTATION The active iris displays the best presentation ACTIVE IRIS image for both bright and dark scenes THEATER The active iris displays the best theater image for both bright and dark scenes OFF The active iris is always open e The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER modes are selected If this occurs select OFF This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data for all the items of the PICTURE menu Selecting a function using the A V buttons and pressing the or ENTER button performs each function ieee SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 LOAD 4 LOAD 3 LOAD 2 LOAD 1 SAVE 1 SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into the memory linked in the number included in the function s name e Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory MY MEMORY LOAD 1 LOAD 2 LOAD 3 LOAD 4 Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked in the number included in the function s name and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data e The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped e Remember that the current adjusted conditi
238. onnect the USB TYPE B port of the projector and the type A USB port of a computer MOUSE USB DISPLAY MOUSE The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse and keyboard of the computer USB DISPLAY The port works as an input port that receives image signals from the computer 186 e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB USB TYPEB TYPEB port e In the following cases a message to notify you that USB TYPE B port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB TYPE B dialog This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the USB TYPE B port is projected The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while this setting is set to MOUSE Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input continued on next page 55 ltem scription O OO O O O The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the gt button of the projector displays a dialog LAMP TIME To reset the lamp time select the OK using the gt button CANCEL gt OK e Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp e For the lamp replacement
239. ons Continued on next page 99 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Cases not involving a machine defect ce The signal cables are not correctly connected l 10 14 Correctly connect the audio cables The MUTE function is working Restore the sound pressing MUTE or VOLUME button on the remote control The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function or the remote control Sound does not come out The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMI audio device The lens cover is attached 4 18 Remove the lens cover The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level 33 Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu function The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug and play monitor Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play 10 monitor using another plug and play monitor The BLANK screen is displayed 28 No pictures are Press BLANK button on the remote control displayed The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to 55 project the picture input to the port Otherwise select other port for picture input
240. ons to enter the ENTER NEW PASSWORD password Move the cursor to the right side box small of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the gt button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and then enter the same password again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the EE MY TEXT PASSWORD KEW PASSWORD AGAIN MY TEXT NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press SoG PASSWORD gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds then Aeae please make note of the password during NOTE MEW PASSVORD ooog this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the en registered password and the screen will Inquiring Coda 0123456789 _ return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off peut a menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect password is input the menu will close large If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit inquiring code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code Your password will be sent after your user registration informatio
241. ontrol TCP 23 TCP 9715 Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used Port Settings Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Default setting is Enable Authentication Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Disable Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Authentication Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Default setting is Enable Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Enable When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required Security Settings Network Control Authentication Password Re enter Authentication Password Enter the desired authentication password This setting will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 and Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Default setting is blank 12 Command control settings TCP 23 1 Command format Same as RS 232C communication refer to RS 232C Communicaton command format 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal Four of the response error code used for TCP 23 are the same as RS 232C Communication 1
242. ording to the following instructions Refer to figures F 1 to F 4 at the back of this manual For details see User s Manual Operating Guide Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to read User s Manual Network Guide too ENGLISH ral AAWARNING P Use only the appropriate accessories Otherwise it could cause a fire or damage the projector and devices e Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector s manufacturer It may be regulated under some standard e Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories e Do not use the damaged accessory Be careful not to damage the accesso ries Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out ACAUTION PFor a cable with a core at only one end connect the end with the core to the projector That may be required by EMI regulations gt Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network gt Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage gt Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data NOTE Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device e Some input ports are selectable in the use For details see User s Manual
243. orrect power outlet Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock e Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the projector and the safety standard e The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to be used Be cautious of the power cord connection Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock e Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand e Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean with no dust before using Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug e Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly Avoid using a loose unsound outlet or contact failure Be sure to connect with ground wire Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal provided at the building using the correct power cord otherwise fire or electric shock can result e Don t take the core of power cord away gt O amp Surely connect the ground wire WARNING Be careful in handling the light source lamp The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out When the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes Please carefully read the section Lamp Be careful in handling the power cord and external connect
244. ou may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Program and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change b You must cause any work that you distribute or publish that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run you must cause it when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty or else saying that you provide a warranty and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions and telling the user how to view a copy of this License Exception if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable se
245. ou to choose to display or not the confirmation dialog for adding a Network configuration L419 28 when you connect your computer to the projector It is turned off by default Optimize Performance The LiveViewer captures computer screen in JPEG data and sends the JPEG data to the projector The LiveViewer has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger but the image quality is better 41 2 1 Using the LiveViewer continued Presenter Mode In the Single PC mode the projector can be occupied by one computer and can block an access from any other computer if the Presenter mode is selected in the LiveViewer While making your presentation you don t need to worry that the image on screen is unexpectedly switched to an image sent by another computer If you want to turn it on put a check mark in the check box NOTE If the Multi PC mode is selected the setting for the Presenter mode is invalid e When switching from the Multi PC mode to the Single PC mode the Presenter mode setting of
246. page 18 WO U 1 7 gt gt WW W TI gt w 01 00 A E E E E E E E E E E E 0g T gt w W TI gt gt u T gt E E E E E E E E E E W TI 3CUSTOM _ 4DEFAULT 4CUSTOM S DEFAULT BE EF SCUSTOM 6 DEFAULT 6 CUSTOM _ a 5 e 9 steps gray scale User Gamma 15 steps gray scale Off BE EF Set 2 Steps gray scale BE EF 15 steps gray scale BE_EF Ramp BE EF mn W m m TnT TH OY THY THY TY TmT THY TY Ty Tm mn Command Data Data Nam ration T Header Operation Type Action Type Setting code User G 00 00 eter BE E 00 00 BE E 00 00 Get e User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 DO c2 06 00 56 70 00 00 Point 7 Reset Get BE EF 03 06 00 7 FF 02 o0 97 30 00 0 E BE E BE EF User Gamma Execute BE EF 03 06 00 2c c3 06 00 57 70 00 00 Point 8 Reset BE EF BE EF E EF COLOR Temp aa u U W m m T Tl Tl 11 TI aa 01 00 08 00 18 00 01 00 09 00 19 00 01 00 OA 00 1A 00 00 00 WO TI e COLOR TEMP increment Increment WO TI E E E E U U 1 71 E E W U 1 71 E E U U T T E E E E E E E E E E E E 00 00 GAIN R 00 00 Bee 00 00 e COLOR TEMP COLOR TEMP BE E 00 00 increment GAIN G increment BE E 00 00 BE E 00 00 COLOR TEMP COLOR TEMP BE E 00 00 GAIN B BE E 0
247. pagina Web http av hitachi com projector index html Si tiene alguna duda sobre el software otorgado bajo licencia pOngase en contacto con su distribuidor Para conocer los detalles de las condiciones de licencia y otras cosas consulte los acuerdos de licencia de cada software en las siguientes paginas 15 y los acuerdos de licencia de cada software en la pagina Web Como los siguientes acuerdos de licencia han sido establecidos por un tercero diferente a nosotros se indican en su original en ingl s Como la licencia del programa el modulo de software se concede gratuitamente el programa se ofrece sin garantias de ningun tipo bien expresas o impl citas en la medida permitida por la ley aplicable Y no aceptamos ninguna responsabilidad ni compensamos por p rdidas de ningun tipo incluido a titulo de ejemplo p rdida de datos p rdida de precision o p rdida de compatibilidad con interfaz entre otros programas por parte del software en cuestion y o la utilizacion del software en la medida permitida por la ley aplicable ESPA NOL Accordo di licenza dell utente finale per il software del proiettore ll software del proiettore costituito da diversi moduli software indipendenti su ognuno dei quali sussiste il nostro copyright e o i copyright di terzi Inoltre il proiettore utilizza moduli software sviluppati e o prodotti da noi II nostro copyright e la nostra proprieta intellettuale si applicano a ciascuno di questi softw
248. parency nor translucency effects Glass Using the LiveViewer with Windows Aero mode continued on next page 90 The LiveViewer does not support these features of Windows Vista Aero 8 Troubleshooting Continued Problem Likely Cause Others infornata irom th Communication between the projector and computer is not working well projector to computer is not correct or completed The projector does not respond Image on screen is frozen NETWORK Functions of the projector is not working well Reference Page Number Things to Check Try RESTART in SERVICE menu under the NETWORK menu User s Manual Operating Guide 91 Je WAVE TAIPEI ONY and aftersales senice If a problem occurs with the equipment please read 8 Troubleshooting 1189 section first and review all suggested check points After that please contact your dealer or service company if you still have the problem They will tell you what warranty condition is applied 92 Projector CP X4021N CP X5021N CP WX4021N User s Manual concise Thank you for purchasing this projector Please read through this manual before using this product in order to use safely and utilize well the product AAWARNING P Before using this product be sure to read all manuals for this product After reading them store them in a safe place for future reference gt Heed all the warnings a
249. ption O O OOOO Using the A buttons turns on off the MyScreen lock function ON amp OFF MyScreen Lock When the ON is selected the item MyScreen is locked Use this function for protecting the current MyScreen e This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu 472 Using the A V buttons turns on off the message function ON amp OFF When the ON is selected the following message function works AUTO IN PROGRESS while automatically adjusting NO INPUT IS DETECTED SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE INVALID SCAN FREQ Searching while searching for the input Detecting while an input signal is detected AUTO ECO MODE while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE The indication of the input signal displayed by changing The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing The indication of FREEZE and II while freezing the screen by pressing the FREEZE button The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing e When the OFF is selected please remember if the picture is frozen Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction 24128 continued on next page 50 ltem i escription Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it 1 Use the
250. put Replace the battery suitably 493 e IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate 0 0 0 0 when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address from DHCP server Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions Choose the RESTART EXECUTE using the button gt ey SERVICE RETURN Then use the button to execute SERVICE s NETWORK RESTART T C K Network will be once cut off when choose restart If DHCP is selected on IP address may be changed After selecting RESTART EXECUTE NETWORK menu may not be controlled approx 30 seconds 70 SAARNA MONU This projector is equipped with security functions From the SECURITY menu items shown in the table below can be performed To use SECURITY menu User registration is required before using the security functions Enter the SECURITY menu 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select ENTER PASSWORD and press the gt button The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed Sea 2 Use the A W lt gt buttons to enter the registered password The ec factory default password is as follows CP X4021N CP X5021N 1700 CP WX4021N 0100 amie This password can be changed LLbelow Move the cursor to the EA e aeeie right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the gt button to TRANSI display the SECURITY menu e It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be changed as soon as possible e If an incorrect passwor
251. put port isn t switched to LAN Things to Check Is the projector s lamp on Is the projector switched to LAN Check the network configurations of the computer and projector If you Change the projector s settings turn off the projector s AC power and then turn it on again If you simply put the projector in STANDBY power mode and then turn it on again the new settings might not take effect Refer to the manual for the firewall software and take one of the following actions Exclude the LiveViewer from blocking item list Disable the firewall while using the LiveViewer Check the network configurations of the computer and projector Check the projector s input port setting Reference Page Number 17 18 19 18 19 An access point is used and your computer is connected to the access point via wireless LAN continued on next page Use network utilities that may come with your computer or wireless LAN card to establish wireless network connection For detail refer to the manual of the computer or the card User s Manual Operating Guide 89 8 Troubleshooting Continued Z aa O D 4 D n 5 mr 0 O 3 Problem The projected image is rather slow compared to that of the computer Can t display the movies correctly Likely Cause The projector isn t capable of relaying dynamic images such as Power
252. quids or foreign object should enter the projector immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer e Do not place the projector near water ex a bathroom a beach etc e Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture Do not place the projector outdoors e Do not place flower vases pots cups cosmetics liquids such as water etc on or around the projector e Do not place metals combustibles etc on or around the projector e To avoid penetration of foreign objects do not put the projector into a case or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector signal cables and connectors Never disassemble and modify The projector contains high voltage components Modification and or disassembly of the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock e Never open the cabinet e Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider Do not give the projector any shock or impact If the projector should be shocked and or broken it could result in an injury and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock If the projector is shocked immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer Do not place the projector on an unstable surface If the projector should be dropped and or broken it could result in an injury and continued use could result in fire or electrical sh
253. r Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not W
254. r filter 91 Replacing the internal clock battery 93 Other care 200 94 Troubleshooting 95 Related messages 95 Regarding the indicator lamps 97 Shutting the projector down 98 Resetting all settings 98 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects 99 Specifications 088 103 Introduction Features The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features v This projector has a variety of I O ports that supposedly cover for any business scene The HDMI port can support various image equipment which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen v This projector has a 1 7 times optical zoom horizontal and vertical manual lens shift allowing flexible installation v Ifyou insert a USB storage device such as a USB memory into the USB TYPE A port and select the port as the input source you can view images stored in the device v This projector can be controlled and monitored via LAN connection v The built in 16W speaker can deliver sufficient sound volume in a large space like a classroom without external speakers Checking the contents of package Please see the Contents of package section in the User s Manual concise which is a book Your projector should come with the items shown there Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing NOTE Keep the original packing materials for f
255. r the rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that you have You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with two steps 1 copyright the software and 2 offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the software Also for each author s protection and ours we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software If the software is modified by someone else and passed on we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors reputations Finally any free program is threatened constantly by software patents We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses in effect making the program proprietary To prevent this we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone s free use or not licensed at all The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING
256. rder to lock the After making sure that the elevator feet are locked put the projector down gently If necessary the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise adjustments Hold the projector when twisting the feet ENGLISH ral To loose an j elevator foot push 6 the elevator button on the same side as it A hy ey ssr adjust twist the foot ACAUTION P Do not handle the elevator buttons without holding the projector since the projector may drop down gt Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 12 degrees using the adjuster feet A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables or the projector itself Displaying the picture 1 2 et ee 10 Activate your signal source Turn the signal source on and make it send the signal to the projector Use the VOLUME VOLUME buttons to adjust the volume To have the projector silent press the MUTE button on the remote control Press the INPUT button on the projector Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port in turn You can also use the remote control to select an input signal Press the VIDEO button for selecting an input signal from the HDMI COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr S VIDEO or VIDEO port or the COMPUTER button for selecting an input signal from the COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 LAN USB TYPE A or
257. re any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used gt Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet ACAUTION P Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation e Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls e Do not stop up block nor cover the projector s vent holes e Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction gt Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place e Do not place the projector near humidifiers Especially for an ultrasonic humidifier chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image degradation or other problems NOTICE Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor e Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused Connecting with your devices Before connecting the projector to a device consult the manual of the device to confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off perform the connection acc
258. recommended to maintain accurate time 59 3 9 Security Settings Displays and configures passwords and other security settings Item Description User Account Configures the user name and password Configures the user name User name The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Configures the password Password The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Re enter Password Reenter the above password for verification Configures the Authentication password for the command Network Control control Authentication Configures the Authentication password The length of the Password text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Re enter Authentication Reenter the above password for verification Password SNMP Configures the community name if SNMP is used Configures the community name The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Community name Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu e Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used 60 3 10 Projector Control The items shown in the table below can be performed using the Proj
259. rectory of the USB memory device will be displayed for the scheduled Slideshow e Please refer to LA Troubleshooting in the User s Manual Operating Guide in case scheduled functions events are not executed appropriately as you ve set al 3 8 Date Time Settings Displays and configures the date and time settings Item Description Current Date Configures the current date in year month day format Current Time Configures the current time in hour minute second format Click the ON check box to enable daylight savings time and Daylight Savings Time Set the following items Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins Configures the month daylight savings time begins 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time begins First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time begins 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time begins 0 59 Configures the date and time daylight savings time ends Configures the month daylight savings time ends 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Configures the hour daylight savings time ends 0 23 minute Configures the min
260. rk picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu 440 The vertical position and horizontal position will be AUTO ADJUST automatically set to the default For a component video signal pASee te The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted e The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input e When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture e When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the PC model e The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu 459 38 INIO From the INPUT menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A cursor buttons and D ADIO 2 VOEO FORMAT press the cursor button or ENTER button to OPTION HOM RANGE execute the item Then perform it according to the So Ea following table Ei C
261. rming this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things
262. rmit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 Copyright 1991 1999 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License version the version number 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
263. rogramowania w zakresie dopuszczonym przez maj ce zastosowanie prawo POL SKI GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 June 1991 Copyright 1989 1991 Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrende
264. rs NOTE If you require the network setting information on the projector take the following procedure to find it out 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A W lt P buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen 3 Use the A V cursor buttons to select the Go to Advanced Menu and use the gt cursor button to enter the item 4 Use the A V cursor buttons to select the NETWORK and use the cursor button to enter the item 5 Use the A V cursor buttons to select the INFORMATION and push the gt cursor button 6 The setting will be displayed in the NETWORK_INFORMATION box 22 1 6 Manual configuration There are 3 options for the manual configuration Select the manuel borac method pou vende Mop toy cen a Profile below at me Healy senm e History E124 e Configure Network Settings Manually 425 te __ cei Pa IP adress Last connected If you select Configure Network Settings E 1921681102 ILOON 3 72 24 PM Manually proceed to item 1 7 Configuring the ecm i Ra network settings manually 4125 F Conana Netw Settings wana 1 6 1 Profile connection Selecting a profile data connect the network ee 1 I r Ti Conner tn im J YOLI Lean with the projector It is required to store the profile data in Date ovited advance 0133 he 11 20 2008 igl PM 1 Select the Profile Projector name
265. rt and the device s RS 232C port with an RS 232C cable for RS 232C communication NOTE Before connecting the devices read the manuals for the devices to ensure the connection For RS 232C connection check the specifications of each port and use the suitable cable Connection to the ports in the User s Manual Operating Guide Technical 74 6 2 Communication setup To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the projector use items in the COMMUNICATION menu Open the menu of the projector and select the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu LQOPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION in the User s Manual Operating Guide 1 Using the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu select the NETWORK BRIDGE for the CONTROL port 2 Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu select the proper baud rate and parity for the CONTROL port according to the specification of the RS 232C port of the connected device Item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps PARITY NONE ODD EVEN Data length 8 bit fixed Start bit 1 bit fixed Stop bit 1 bit fixed 3 Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu set up the proper method for the CONTROL port according to your use NOTE The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE as the default setting e Using the COMMUNICATION menu set up the communication Remember that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication e When COMMUNICATION
266. rt home ee was page on how to enable DirectDraw or Direct3D un NOTE Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays and it does not constitute or imply a machine defect 102 Specifications Please see the Specifications in the User s Manual concise which is a book End User License Agreement for the Projector Software e Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules e Be sure to read End User License Agreement for the Projector Software which is a separate document 103 Projector CP X4021N CP X5021N CP WX4021N User s Manual detailed Network Guide WRU AANA XX LAL VAY LAA Thank you for purchasing this product This manual is intended to explain only the network function For proper use of this product please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product Features This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features v Network Presentation allows the projector to project computer images transmitted through a network 137 v Web Control allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a computer L445 v My Image allows the projector to store up to four still images and project the
267. rwise clear the check box 5 Click the Apply button to save the settings When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Select the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password 8 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 e The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu 71 Oe MESMA RUMAN The projector can display the text data transferred via the network on the screen The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text transferred from the computer on real time and the other chooses and displays the text data from the ones once stored in the projector lt M lt T GEE gt gt lt gt 27S Qe KGS gt wT D abcdefghijkimnoparstuvwxyz 5 onto Le A ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ 0123456789 P Today s Topics The chemical Today s Topics The chemical class is Display text data ex B canceled e The PE is performed at a m gym
268. s Production onain http www hitachidigitalmedia com Direct link to http www hitachiserviceeu com support quides manual download userguides htm NOTE he information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment e Mac Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc e Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corp e Adobe and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Microsoft Internet Explorer Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e Blu ray Disc is a trademark All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners End User License Agreement for the Projector Software e Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules e Be sure
269. s selected moving pictures are displayed more smoothly continued on next page 41 ltem escription O O O The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input signals can be set on this projector 1 In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the A V buttons and press the gt button The RESOLUTION menu will be n displayed STANDARD 1024 x 768 2 In the RESOLUTION menu select the E RER e hi tie Sh re wish to display using STANDARD 1960 768 the A V buttons 5 STANDARD 1366 x TBS Selecting AUTO will set a resolution or appropriate to the input signal 3 Pressing the gt or ENTER button when selecting a STANDARD resolution will automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and horizontal size ee nM The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be 1024 x 768 G60Hz displayed 4 To set a custom resolution use the A V buttons to select the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION CUSTOM box will be displayed CUSTOM iil RESOLUTION STANDARD RESOLUTION Set the horizontal HORZ and vertical VERT resolutions using M RESOLUTION _CUSTOM the A W lt gt buttons HoRZ VERT This function may not support all Ee resolutions 5 Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the gt or ENTER button The message ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE RESOLUTION appears To save the setting press the gt button The horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and hor
270. s the direct power on function on off AUTO POWER OFF Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal is detected USB TYPE B Selects the USB TYPE B setting Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 1 button on the included remote control Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 2 button on the included remote control MY SOURCE Selects the My Source setting REMOTE FREQ Turns the remote control signal frequency normal function NORMAL on off REMOTE FREQ Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on HIGH off MY BUTTON 1 MY BUTTON 2 65 3 10 Projector Control Continued SEES The items shown in the table below can be Projector Control Service performed using the Projector Control menu eee eee Click the QUIT PRESENTER MODE Item Description acces Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode 66 3 11 Remote Control j O ra sa You can use your Web browser to control the Ss projector EA e Do not attempt to control the projector with vane lt the projector s remote control and via your Web eae browser at the same time It may cause some a operational errors in the projector te teeth Be alas py ia The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote Control screen Item Description POWER Assigned the same operation as STANDBY ON button COMPUTER Assigned the same operation as COMP
271. s value is attached to the reply data 86 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued Reply Data format The connection ID the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending data format is attached to the RS 232C commands reply data lt ACK reply gt Connection ID 1 byte lt NAK reply gt Connection ID 1 byte lt Error reply gt Error code Connection ID 2 bytes lt Data reply gt 1 byte Connection ID lt Projector busy reply gt Status code 1 byte Connection ID 2 bytes lt Authentication error reply gt Authentication Error code 1 byte Connection ID 1 byte 87 7 4 Command Control via the Network Continued Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set
272. sage Power off will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Press the STANDBY ON button again while the message appears The projector lamp will go off and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange Then POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete 4197 3 Attach the lens cover after the POWER indicator turns in steady orange Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp NOTE Turn the power on off in right order Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices e This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on off Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON E154 and AUTO POWER OFF L155 items of the OPTION menu e Use the shutdown switch 4198 only when the projector is not turned off by normal procedure penating VOLUME button Adjusting the volume 1 Use the VOLUME VOLUME buttons to adjust the volume A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in adjusting the volume If you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds e When X is selected for current picture input port the volume adjustment is disabled Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu
273. scription The internal temperature is rising Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After having confirmed the following items please turn the power ON again Sre Upe ee t e Is there blockage of the air passage aperture e Is the air filter dirty e Does the peripheral temperature exceed 35 C If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please set FAN SPEED of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu to HIGH A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean or change the air filter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the air filter section of this manual After you have cleaned or changed the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer 56 91 The button operation is not available 96 Regarding the indicator lamps When operation of the LAMP TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual check and cope with it according to the following table For the SECURITY indicator see SECURITY INDICATOR in the SECURITY menu POWER LAMP TEMP Description indicator indicator indicator p Lighting Turned Turned The projector is in a standby state In Orange off off Please refer to the section Power on off Blinking Turned Turned The projector is warming up off off Please wait In Green Blinking In Red Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red B
274. see the section Replacing the lamp 89 The filter time is the usage time of the air filter counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the gt button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the filter time select the OK using the gt button CANCEL gt OK e Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter e For the air filter cleaning see the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter 391 FILTER TIME continued on next page 56 ttem escription This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON 1 2 on the remote control G6 1 Use the A V buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a MY BUTTON 1 2 and press the gt or ENTER button to display the MY BUTTON setup dialog 2 Then using the A W lt gt buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen button Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the setting e LAN Selects input from LAN port e USB TYPE A Selects input from USB TYPE A port e USB TYPE B Selects input from USB TYPE B port e HDMI Selects input from HDMI port e COMPUTER IN1 Selects the input from COMPUTER IN1 port e COMPUTER IN2 Selects the input from COMPUTER IN2 port e COMPONENT Selects the input from COMPONENT ports e S VIDEO Selects the input from S VIDEO port e VIDEO Se
275. selected image as the last image in the STOP Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file L85 SKIP Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file L85 Press the gt cursor button or ENTER to rotate the selected ROTATE image 90 degrees clockwise This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file R485 19 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by the menu on the Thumbnail screen You can also control the images by using the menu on the Thumbnail screen Moves to an upper folder Allows you to sort files and folders as following RETURN bile gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail gt RETURN Bees gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device from the projector After that the projector will not recognize a USB storage device until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A input port REMOVE USB SORT 80 PC LESS Presentation continued NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed e The Thumbnail mode shows 20 pictures in 1 page as maximum e It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen is displayed e Some error icons will be displayed in the Thumbn
276. send images to the projector click the Yes The transmission will be started To display the transmitted images select the LAN port as input source on the projector e Not to send click the No then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode Stand by mode is the state where there is no image transmission although the network connection is established The transmission can be started if you click or button on the LiveViewer main menu If you wish to use the current connection setting as a profile data for My Connection check in the box for the Register this setting to My Connection Troubleshooting E This projector is currently in use Presenting by another user The projector you want to send your images Thi proctor s cumontiy in Lise Praning by anathir to is occupied by another computer in the user You cannot connect with this peojector unti the ather Season Presenter Mone i iniheard Presenter mode Click the OK then the LiveViewer main menu is displayed in stand by mode Retry to send your images after the Presenter mode is off 30 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination continued E A Slideshow is currently running on the projector that you are trying to display to The projector you want to send your images A Sidinchow 6 Cumontiy unreg on tha projector that you to is in the Slideshow mode in the PC LESS ara trying to dhplay to
277. serial communication refer to the User s Manual Network Guide continued on next page 60 pttem escription COMMUNICATION TYPE Select the communication type for transmission via the CONTROL port NETWORK BRIDGE OFF NETWORK BRIDGE Select this type if it is required to control an external device as a network terminal via this projector from the computer The CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands Network Bridge Function in the User s Manual Network Guide OFF Select this mode to receive RS 232C commands using the CONTROL port e OFF is selected as the default setting e When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE check the item TRANSMISSTION METHOD below SERIAL SETTINGS Select the serial communication condition for the CONTROL port BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Te E SS SERVICE COMMUNICATION i tinued continued continued PARITY NONE amp ODD EVEN e The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY is fixed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF above TRANSMISSION METHOD Select the transmission method for communication by the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication trans
278. sets the filter time which counts usage time of the air filter PICEER TME A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu 56 Using the lt gt buttons changes the display language LANGUAGE See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu 1148 Press the or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE ADVANCED MENU IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK or SECURITY EXIT Press the lt or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu 32 KOU R MEAN From the PICTURE menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Item Description inact BRIGHTNESS Using the ha buttons adjusts the brightness Dark Light CONTRAST Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the contrast Weak Strong Using the A V buttons switches the gamma mode 1 DEFAULT amp 1 CUSTOM 2 DEFAULT 2 CUSTOM 3 DEFAULT t g 6 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM 2 2 6 DEFAULT amp 5 CUSTOM 5 DEFAULT 4 CUSTOM 4 DEFAULT To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode This function is useful when you want to change the brightness of particular tones Choose an item us
279. sion cable to connect the USB storage device continued on next page 12 Connecting with your devices continued Digital VCR DVD Blu ray Disc player video AUDIOOUT VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT device pm L Cb Pb Cr Pr QQQ EEEH M USB TYPE A 3 B 3 R Cr Pr DC5V 0 5A i N aoj lt o NTN 41 REMOTE CONTROL AUDIO IN2 L are NOTE The HDMI port of this model is compatible with HDCP High band width Digital Content Protection and therefore capable of displaying a video signal from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like The HDMI supports the following video signals 480i 60 480p 60 576i1 50 576p 50 720p 50 60 1080i 50 60 1080p 50 60 This projector can be connected with another equipment that has HDMI con nector but with some equipment the projector may not work properly some thing like no video Be sure to use an HDMI cable that has the HDMI logo When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector use a DVI to HDMI cable to connect with the HDMI input continued on next page Connecting with your devices continued Monitor Speakers with an amplifier Microphone system ea Ee remote _ ee control optional USB TYPE A DC5V 0 5A REMOTE CONTROL NOTE If a loud feedback noise is pr
280. specified in the other manual of this projector e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading the battery e If you observe a leakage of the battery wipe out the flower and then replace the battery If the flower adheres your body or clothes rinse well with water e Obey the local laws on disposing the battery A CAUTION Be careful in moving the projector Neglect could result in an injury or damage e Do not move the projector during use Before moving disconnect the power cord and all external connections and close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap e Avoid any impact or shock to the projector e Do not drag the projector e For moving the projector use the enclosed case or bag if provided Do not put anything on top of the projector Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling and cause an injury or damage Use special caution in households where children are present Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector Neglect could result in an injury or damage e Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part Do not attach anything other than specified options such as conversion lens to the screw thread Avoid a smoky humid or dusty place Placing the projector in a smoke a highly humid dusty place oily soot or corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock e Do not place the projector near a smoky humid
281. t the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product e If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative e Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use e Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage ENGLISH ral Cleaning and replacing the air filter Please check and clean the air filter periodically When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible The air filter of this projector consists of a filter cover and a filter unit with two types of filter If one or both of the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace the filter unit with a new one Request for a filter unit with the following type number from your dealer when purchasing a new unit Type number MU06641 Filter unit The specified filter unit also comes with a replacement lamp for this projector Please replace the filter unit as well when you replace the lamp 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to sufficiently cool
282. ta display 472 Slideshow Configures the Start Stop parameters for the Slideshow Click the Register button to add new commands to the schedule list Click the Delete button to delete commands from the schedule list Click the Reset button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings from the schedule list 56 3 7 Schedule Settings Continued NOTE After the projector is moved check the date and time set for the projector before configuring the schedules Strong shock may make the date and time settings E1158 get out of tune e Events My Image and Messenger will not be executed appropriately but result in schedule execution error status in case lamp does not light or and display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution time e Events Input Source and My Image will not be executed if security feature is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature e Certain error state in the projector Such as temperature error lamp error will prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions events e If no USB memory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for display exists at the scheduled event time a schedule execution error occurs against the scheduled Slideshow event e When you start the Slideshow input source will be automatically switched to the USB TYPE A port e Image files stored in the root di
283. table pane REDEE below can be performed a ar eooc Orte Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and 1an SEAT PER press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute fer a the item except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER Eer TIME Then perform it according to the following table om ltem scription Using the A buttons turns on off the automatic signal search function ON amp OFF When the ON is selected detecting no signal automatically cycles through input ports in the following order The search is started from AUTO SEARCH the current port Then when an input is found the projector will stop searching and display the image COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN gt USB TYPE A VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT HDMI lt USB TYPE B e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Using the A V buttons turns on off the automatic keystone function ON OFF ON Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed whenever changing the slant of the projector AUTO OFF This function is disabled Please execute the AUTO KEYSTONE KEYSTONE EXECUTE in the SETUP menu for automatic keystone distortion correction e When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will not function properly so select the OFF e This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on C74 Using the A V buttons turns on off the DIRECT POWER ON function ON
284. tatus Item Description Error Status Displays the current error status Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current filter Power Status Displays the current power status Input Status Displays the current input signal source Blank On Off Displays the current Blank on off status Mute Displays the current Mute on off status Freeze Displays the current Freeze status 68 3 13 Network Restart eee Cee Piri 1 te Restarts the projector s network connection Item Description Restart Restarts the projector s network connection in order to activate new configuration settings NOTE Restarting requires you to re log on in order to further control or configure the projector via a web browser Wait 30 seconds or more after clicking the Restart button to log on again 69 A IAN Wane CO RUNA The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network lt P gt S25 SS gt Ce gt e gt 27 gt ELA e J Display image data D MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer PJlmg Projector Image Tool is necessary to use MY IMAGE transmission It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Refer to the manual for the application for instructions
285. te Time Settings in the User s Manual Network Guide then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation e The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL E2145 ltem Desoription Selecting this item displays the SETUP SETUP Menu for the network a Use the A V buttons to select an item SUBNET MASK a DEFAULT GATEWAY and the or ENTER button on the remote ERZES control to perform the item 1 DATE AND TM Use the A V buttons to turn DHCP on off ON OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP DHCP enabled E A e When the DHCP setting changes to ON it g takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP Protocol server e Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is ON continued on next page 64 Description Use the A W lt P buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF IP ADDRESS The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the network You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network e The IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A W lt buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by
286. tes of data NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each device and connect them correctly with suitable cables e Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data e Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code e The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON and when the lamp is lit Ignore this data e Commands are not accepted during warm up e When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code the projector ignore the excess data code Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length code the projector returns the error code to the computer SOMEM SONA Wire ware NEAN When the projector connects network the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer with web browser For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table L17 Connection 4 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projector s LAN port and the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure Use CAT 5 or greater LAN Cable when LAN ports are used 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on LAN cable CAT 5 or greater 11 Communicaion Port The following two ports are assigned for the command c
287. the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered password and the screen will return to the ees TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu mureni a If an incorrect password is input the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 ENTER PASSWORD box large 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page 74 ltem escription O OOO The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten When the password is set for the MY TEXT e The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable which can prohibit changing the DISPLAY setting e The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable which can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and press the gt button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu to select ON The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small will SN Ae oe be displayed oe ee Le 1 3 Use the A W lt P butt
288. the network connection method There are some options to connect to the Select the op fen that desorbed the connection method you wauki network plore e Enter PassCode a O e Configure Manually a ee e Select From List Select one of them to meet your requirement Prd The Pepot amp a 12sckgt code that can bo found on the Startup Screen of the projector you are curentiy trying to connect to Bak Mota Ent Enter PassCode If you want to use the Passcode for network connection select the Enter PassCode and click the Next The Passcode is given by the projector on screen And you simply input the Passcode to the LiveViewer to connect the network Proceed to item 1 5 1 Passcode connection L15 Configure Manually Select the Configure Manually and click the Next Then proceed to item 1 6 Manual Configuration 123 Select From List Before selecting this item your computer and the projectors need to be connected to the same network If the connection is already established select the Select From List From the list of the projectors connected to the network select which projector you would like to send your images Proceed to 1 8 Confirming the connection to your destination L30 14 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued 1 5 1 Passcode connection The unique Passcode system brings you very quick and simple connection to the network The Passcode is a code that expresses
289. the network setting in the projector If you input the code in the LiveViewer in your computer the network setting in the projector and computer can be matched and the connection will be established immediately The section is intended to explain how to use the Passcode 1 Getting the Passcode The Passcode is 12 digit code consisting of alphanumeric characters 1 9 and A Z Example PASSCODE 1234 5678 9ABC The Passcode is given on the projector when the LAN port is selected as input source NOTE The Passcode system does not work under the condition below If such is the case establish the connection manually 1 Subnet mask is not Class Aor B or C The Passcode system accepts Class A B and C only Class A 255 0 0 0 ClassB 255 255 0 0 Class C 255 255 255 0 There are two methods to get the Passcode from the projector Method 1 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the COMPUTER button on the remote control or INPUT button on the projector to select the LAN as input port If there is no signal on the LAN port you can find the Passcode on screen 1 5 Selecting the network connection method continued Method 2 1 Turn on the projector and make sure that the projector image is on screen 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the A W lt b buttons on the projector to show the menu on screen 3 Use the A V cursor buttons to select the
290. the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring maintenance or detected an error NOTE Up to five e mail addresses can be specified e The projector may be not able to send e mail if the projector suddenly loses power Mail Settings 152 To use the projector s e mail alert function please configure the following items through a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Mail Settings and configure each item Refer to item 3 5 Mail Settings L452 for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE Click the Send Test Mail button in the Mail Settings to confirm that the e mail settings are correct The following mail will be delivered to the specified addresses Subject line Test Mail lt Projector name gt Text Send Test Mail Date lt Testing date gt Time lt Testing time gt IP Address lt Projector IP address gt MAC Address lt Projector MAC address gt 78 7 1 E mail Alerts Continued 5 Click the Alert Settings on the main menu to configure the E mail Alerts settings 6 Select and configure each alert item Refer to item 3 6 Alert Setting 153 for further information 7 Click the Apply button to save the settings Failure Warning e mails are for
291. time rotation setting and skip setting interval time It can be set from 0 to 999900 ms with an increment of 100 ms rotation setting rot1 means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise rot2 and rot3 increase another 90 degrees in order skip setting SKIP means that the image will not be displayed in the Slideshow NOTE The maximum length in a line on the playlist txt file is 255 characters including linefeed If any line exceeds the limit the playlist txt file becomes invalid e Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist However if some folders exist in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow e If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space the playlist txt file cannot be created e For the Slideshow settings refer to the section Slideshow mode 483 85 USB Display The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable 410 Hardware and software requirement for computer e OS One of the following 32 bit version only Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise e CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher e Memory 512 MB or higher e Hard disk
292. tion area once it starts You can quit the application from your computer by selecting Quit on the menu NOTE The LiveViewer refer to the User s Manual Network Guide and this application cannot be used at the same time If you connect your computer to the projector by using a USB cable while the LiveViewer is running the following message will be displayed e If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer make the firwall function invalid with following the user s manual e Some security software may block image transmission Please change the security software setting to allow the use of LiveViewer Lite for USB USB Display continued Right Click menu The menu shown in the right will be displayed Display when you right click the application icon in the Windows notification area Quit xo 3 00 PM Display The Floating menu is displayed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area Quit The application is closed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area NOTE If you wish to restart the application you need to unplug the USB cable and plug it again Floating menu If you select Display on the Right Click menu the Floating menu shown in the right LiveViewer Lite will appear on your computer screen as tor J 2 EEP Start capture button The transmission to the projector is started and the
293. tions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help ENGLISH ral INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC Federal Communication Commission equipment provided that the following conditions are met Some cables have to be used
294. to password and the random 8 bytes are a572f60c 1 Select the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes a572f60c from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes a572f60c and the Authentication Password password and it becomes a5 72f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5 Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde in front of the commands and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde command 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection 88 8 ro bleshooting Problem No image The projector that you want to connect to is nowhere to be found on the list of available projectors O O 5 5 D QO et O S a O mr j 0 Z D r O Can t communicate Likely Cause The projector is not turned on The projector s input source isn t switched to LAN The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly Firewall software other than Windows Firewall is installed in your computer The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly The projector in
295. to lock the elevator feet After making sure that the elevator feet are locked p put the projector down gently To finely adjust twist the foot If necessary the elevator feet can be manually twisted to make more precise adjustments Hold the projector when twisting the feet Te E 22 Adjusting the lens Use the ZOOM ring to adjust the screen size Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture FOCUS ring ZOOM ring LOCK Horizontal adjuster lock HORIZONTAL adjuster VERTICAL adjuster Ta FOCUS ZOOM Turn the VERTICAL adjuster fully counter clockwise Then turn it clockwise and adjust SE the vertical lens position upward Turn the LOCK counter clockwise to loosen the lock of the HORIZONTAL adjuster Turn the HORIZONTAL adjuster clockwise or counter clockwise to adjust the horizontal lens position Me hI e a a Ys ll em Turn the LOCK fully clockwise to tighten it and lock the horizontal lens position Use the FOCUS ring to focus the picture 6 l NOTE Use a hexagon wrench to turn the VERTICAL HORIZONTAL adjusters and LOCK If you do not have a hexagon wrench you can use a flathead screwdriver with more careful handling e Use the LOCK so that the lens does not shift from the adjusted horizontal lens position Adjusting the vertical lens position may shift the horizontal lens position
296. to read End User License Agreement for the Projector Software which is separated document in the CD Projector CP X4021N CP X5021N CP WX4021N User s Manual detailed Operating Guide Technical gt elnny OKs OL Comm OUMetr Sielarel Resolution H x V H frequency kHz V frequency Hz Rating Signal mode 720 x 400 37 9 85 0 VESA TEXT VGA 85Hz SVGA 60Hz 832x624 497 745 Mac 16 mode 1024x768 484 600 VESA XGA 60Hz 1024x768 60 0 75 0 VESA XGA 75Hz 1280x768 477 600 VESA W XGA 60Hz 1280x800 497 60 0 VESA _ 1280x800 60Hz 1280x960 60 0 60 0 VESA_ 1280 x 960 60Hz 1280x1024 64 0 600 VESA SXGA 60Hz 1280 x 1024 VESA SXGA 75Hz 1280 x 1024 VESA SXGA 85Hz 1400 x 1050 65 2 60 0 VESA SXGA 60Hz 1600 x 1200 VESA UXGA 60Hz NOTE Be sure to check jack type signal level timing and resolution before connecting this projector to a PC e Some PCs may have multiple display screen modes Use of some of these modes will not be possible with this projector e Depending on the input signal full size display may not be possible in some cases Refer to the number of display pixels above e Although the projector can display signals with resolution up to UXGA 1600x1200 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions
297. to the previous display press the lt cursor button or ESC button on the remote control Indication in OSD On Screen Display BRIGHTNESS i lt RETURN si FILTER TIME T TEMPORARY CONDITION RESET ARE YOU SURE ee aa YOU WISH TO LOAD we Selecting this word finishes the OSD menu It s the same as pressing the MENU button RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu CANCEL or NO Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present menu and returns to the previous menu OK or YES Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts the menu to the next menu 30 NSC ML INIS From the EASY MENU items shown in the table EASY MENU below can be performed ETAREN EXECUTE Select an item using the A cursor buttons Then Se i perform it according to the following table Se a ECO MODE NORMAL MIRROR NORMAL RESET EXECUTE FILTER TIME Oh LANGUAGE ENGLISH m ADVANCED MENU COMPUTER IN 1 EXIT 1024 x 768 60Hz Item Description ASPECT Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu 36 Using the button executes the auto keystone function AUTO KEYSTONE See the AUTO KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu 043 Using the lt gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion O KEYSTONE Sge the I KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu L443 Using the lt gt buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion KEYSTONE See t
298. tor will light up in steady orange Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated L454 the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on AWARNING PPlease use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock e Only use the power cord that came with the projector If it is damaged consult your dealer to get a new one e Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the power cord for complete separation e Never modify the power cord Anti theft chain or wire Using the security bar and slot A commercially available anti theft chain or wire can be attached to the security bar on the projector Refer to the figure to choose an anti theft chain or wire Also this product has the security slot for the Kensington lock For details see the manual of the security tool AWARNING PDo not use the security bar and slot to prevent the projector from falling down since it is not designed for it ACAUTION P amp Do not place anti theft chain or wire near the exhaust vents It may become too hot NOTE The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention measures It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure 15 ROMO CANOA Installing the batteries Please insert t
299. twork Restart and configure the following items 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Click the SNMP and set the community name on the screen that is displayed NOTE A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been changed Click the Network Restart and configure the following items 8 Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures Warnings Click the Alert Settings on the main menu and select the Failure Warning item to be configured 9 Click the Enable check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures Warnings Clear the Enable check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required 10 Click the Apply button to save the settings 80 7 3 Event Scheduling The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on power off It enables to be self management projector NOTE You can schedule the following control events Power Input Source My Image Messenger Slideshow E2156 e The power on off event has the lowest priority among the all events that are defined at the same time e There are 3 types of Scheduling 1 daily 2 weekly 3 specific date 22155 e The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1 specific date 2 weekly 3 daily e Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events Priority is given to those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled for the same date and time e g Spec
300. ty e Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens used to clean cameras eyeglasses etc Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects Take care of the cabinet and the remote control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc e Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote control When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water wet and wring out the soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use undiluted detergent directly e Do not use an aerosol sprays solvents volatile substances or abrasive cleaner e Before using chemical wipes be sure to read and observe the instructions e Do not allow long term close contact with rubber or vinyl About bright spots or dark spots Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect Be careful of printing of the LCD panel If the projector continues projecting a still image inactive images or 16 9 aspect images in case of 4 3 panel etc for long time the LCD panel might possibly be printed NOTE About consumables Lamp LCD panels polarizors and other optical components and air filter and cooling fans have a different lifetime in each These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage time e This product isn t desig
301. u produzimos E ai residem os nossos direitos de autor e propriedade intelectual para esse software e itens relacionados mas n o limitados aos documentos relacionados com o software Os direitos acima est o protegidos pela lei de direitos de autor e outras leis aplic veis E o projector utiliza m dulos de software licenciados como freeware de acordo com GNU General Public License Version 2 e GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2 1 estabelecidas pela Free Software Foundation Inc E U A ou contratos de licen a para cada software Consulte a p gina de Internet seguinte para contratos de licen a para tais m dulos de software e outro software Endere o da pagina de Internet http av hitachi com projector index html Em caso de d vidas contacte o seu revendedor relativamente ao software licenciado Consulte os contratos de licen a de cada software nas paginas seguintes G15 e contratos de licen a de cada software na pagina de Internet para detalhes sobre as condi es da licen a e assim por diante Uma vez que os contratos de licen a seguintes sao estabelecidos por terceiros estes sao declarados no ingl s original Uma vez que o programa modulo de software licenciado gratuitamente o programa fornecido tal como esta sem qualquer tipo de garantia expressa ou impl cita ate ao limite permitido pela lei aplic vel E nao nos responsabilizamos nem compensamos por qualquer tipo de perda incluindo mas n o limitad
302. ublic License along with this program if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 51 Franklin St Fifth Floor Boston MA 02110 1301 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program is interactive make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode Gnomovision version 69 Copyright year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course the commands you use may be called something other than show w and show c they could even be mouse clicks or menu items whatever suits your program You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or your school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary Here is a sample alter the names Yoyodyne Inc hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the 17 program Gnomovision which makes passes at compilers written by James Hacker lt signature of Ty Coon gt 1 April 1989 Ty Coon President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to pe
303. uch as ceiling mount the specified mounting accessories EXSpecifications in the User s manual concise and service may be required Before installing the projector consult your dealer about your installation Arrangement Refer to the following tables T 1 and T 2 to determine the screen size and projection distance The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen B x V Screen size Projection distance from the projector s end Screen height A T 1 CP X4021N CP X5021N 4 3 ETOJACHON Screen height distance inch cm inch cmiinch Screen size miim Projector top Projector bottom 1024X768 10 Projection distance inch m inch cm Screen height inch cm i 57 46 0 4 0 9 0 5 1 3 3 1 6 63 44 0 6 1 6 0 7 1 9 2 1 84 58 106 73 2128 51371107 01571122 0 9 2 3 51771137 0197 152 1 21 3 3 129 5 5 215 145 0237 183 5297 229 1 5 3 9 1 9 5 0 155 6 6 195 8 2 258 174 323 218 86 31 123910 1 396 305 496 381 2 5 6 6 3 1 8 3 261 11 0 327 13 7 432 291 941 363 114 42 te EE 619 1 360 15 1 096 457 continued on next page OOo OO O O O1 O OO OO Ol1O O Ol O OlO OlO O O O 3 10 0 39
304. uksista Verkkosivun osoite http av hitachi com projector index html Ota yhteys myyj n saadaksesi tietoa k ytt oikeuksin suojatusta ohjelmistosta Katso kunkin ohjelmiston kayttooikeussopimus seuraavilta sivuilta G75 ja kayttooikeussopimusten yksityiskohtaiset tiedot kunkin ohjelmiston verkkosivuilta Seuraavat k ytt oikeussopimukset ovat vain englanniksi koska ne ovat kolmannen osapuolten sopimuksia Koska ohjelma ohjelmistomoduuli on ilmaisohjelmisto se toimitetaan sellaisenaan ilman mink nlaista suoraa tai ep suoraa takuuta sovellettavan lain sallimissa rajoissa Emme ota vastuuta tai korvaa mit n menetyst mukaan lukien mutta ei rajoittuen tietojen menetyst tarkkuuden menetyst tai muiden ohjelmien v lisen yhteensopivuuden menetyst ohjelmiston osalta ja tai ohjelmiston k yt n osalta sovellettavan lain sallimissa rajoissa 13 Suo MI Umowa licencyjna uzytkownika koncowego oprogramowania projektora Oprogramowanie projektora sk ada sie z pewnej liczby niezale nych modu w oprogramowania a ka dy z takich modu w jest obj ty naszym prawem autorskim lub prawem autorskim strony trzeciej Projektor korzysta r wnie z modu w oprogramowania kt re stworzyli my i lub wyprodukowali my Ka de takie oprogramowanie oraz powi zane elementy w czaj c ale nie ograniczaj c sie do dokumentacji oprogramowania obj te jest prawem autorskim i prawami w asno ci intelektualnej Powy sze praw
305. uld cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number DT01171 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted on a ceiling or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case of replacement by yourself follow the following procedure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it 4 Loosen the 3 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles Never loosen any other screws D Insert the new lamp and retighten firmly the 3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place Lamp cover 3 6 While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover 7 Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the gt button 3 Po
306. up to remove it 4 Pry up the battery using a flathead screwdriver or the like to take it out While prying it up put a finger lightly on the battery since it may pop out of the holder 5 Replace with a new battery of the specified type With the plus side facing up slide the battery under the claw of the spring fitting And press down on the battery until it snaps into place 6 Replace the battery cover in place then turn it in the direction indicated CLOSE to position the knob of the cover with the dot on the bottom case to fix the cover using a coin or the like te AWARNING P Be careful of handling a battery as a battery can cause explosion cracking or leakage which could result in a fire an injury and environment pollution e Use only the specified and perfect battery Do not use a battery with damage such as a scratch a dent rust or leakage e When replacing the battery replace it with a new battery e When a battery leaked wipe the leakage out well with a waste cloth If the leakage adhered to your body immediately rinse it well with water When a battery leaked in the battery holder replace the batteries after wiping the leakage out e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery e Do not work on a battery for example recharging or soldering e Keep a battery in a dark cool and dry place Never expose a battery to a fire or water e Keep a battery awa
307. ure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide and lift the lamp cover to the side to remove it Loosen the 3 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pick up the lamp by the handles Never loosen any other screws Insert the new lamp and retighten firmly the 3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the gt button 3 Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the V A button then press the gt button 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 5 Press the gt button to select OK on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time lamp cover N O O Ff NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp 89 Replacing the lamp continued Lamp warning A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE AWARNING P The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or b
308. urn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws e For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US e For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling Z so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate the Disconnect room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out the plug from the projector s vent holes and not to get them into your eyes or mouth eo e Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power outet Cord then wait
309. ut e The FRAME LOCK message on the dialog means the frame lock function is working e The SCART RGB message means the COMPONENT ports is working as a SCART RGB input port Please refer to the SERVICE COMPONENT item in INPUT menu 39 continued e This item can t be selected for no signal and sync out e When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON the MY TEXT is displayed together with the input information in the INPUT_INFORMATION box 476 FACTORY RESET Selecting OK using the button performs this function By this function all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the initial setting Note that the items LAMP TIME FILTER TIME LANGUAGE FILTER MESSAGE NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not reset CANCEL gt OK 63 NT aA AOU Tanker Remember that incorrect network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the network Be sure to consult with your network administrator before connecting to an existing access point on your network K SERS Select NETWORK from the main menu to access the following functions Select an item using the A V cursor buttons on the projector or remote control and press the gt cursor button on the projector or remote control or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table See the User s Manual Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation NOTE If you are not utilizing SNTP LLDa
310. ute daylight savings time ends 0 59 58 3 8 Date Time Settings Continued Item Description Configures the time difference Set the same time difference Time difference as the one set on your computer If unsure consult your IT manager Click the ON check box to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server and set the following items Configures the SNTP server address in IP format e The address allows not only IP address but also domain SNTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time Cycle information from the SNTP server hour minute Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection by clicking the Network Restart on the main menu e If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses To enable the SNTP function the time difference must be set e The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and override time settings when SNTP is enabled e The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is
311. ution of the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 4 You may not copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense or distribute the Program is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 5 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Program or any work based on the Program you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it 6 Each time you redistribute the Program or any work based on the Program the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this L
312. uture reshipment Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens e The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction Part names Projector 1 Lamp cover L489 The lamp unit is inside 2 Speakers x2 L19 46 3 Filter cover L91 The air filter and intake vent are inside Elevator feet x2 2122 Elevator buttons x2 L22 Remote sensor L16 Lens L194 Lens cover Pocket caps 0 Intake vents 1 Control panel 5 2 Lens adjuster door 5 The adjusters for the lens are behind the door 13 AC IN AC inlet 2115 14 Exhaust vent 15 Rear panel 115 16 Security bar L15 17 Battery cover 193 The internal clock battery is inside 18 Heel AWARNING PDo not open or remove any portion of the product unless the manuals direct it gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions gt Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product gt Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is on gt Keep the pocket caps away from children and pets Make sure they do not swallow the caps If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment 4 CAUTION P amp Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust AN vents during use or
313. ves a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest vali
314. want to uniblock LvaViewer LiveViewer is blocked by the firewall E Alpa dominaban wath Levira by adding it ta tho Encoptiong Et e To turn it disabled Off click the Yes e Not to turn it disabled Off click the No but the projector may not be able to communicate with your computer through the network e If you put a check mark in the Allow communication with LiveViewer by adding it to the Exceptions list box the LiveViewer will never be blocked by Windows firewall iver e Proceed to item 1 5 Selecting the network connection method 14 NOTE If you click the Yes the network access by the LiveViewer is temporally permitted by Windows firewall until the LiveViewer is closed e If any application software having the firewall function is installed into you computer make the firewall function invalid with following the user s manual 11 1 4 Selecting the network connection mode continued 1 4 2 Selecting My Connection Select the My Connection and click the Connect u W Seloct the Network Conmachion that yau would eo to usn M inais LAN Winged LAN If you select the My Connection the computer is connected to the projector through the network by using the profile data that is pre assigned to My Connection L435 When you select the My Connection the Corrant Exit computer immediately starts the connection to the projector Proceed to item
315. with the core set Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection For cables that have a core only at one end connect the core to the projector CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Regulatory notices continued About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Equipment Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted municipal waste but use the return and collection systems available If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment display the chemical symbol Hg Cd or Pb then it means that the battery has a heavy metal content of more than 0 0005 Mercury or more than 0 002 Cadmium or more than 0 004 Lead ey The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Contents of package Your projector should come with the items shown below Check that all the items are included Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing Remote control with two AA batteries Power cord Computer cable Lens cover User s manuals Book x1 CD x1 Security label Application CD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SS SS ke ON ON NOTE Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment Be sure to use the original
316. y from children and pets Be careful for them not to swallow a battery If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment e Obey the local laws on disposing a battery 16 Using the CD manual The other manuals for this product are written into the included CD ROM titled User s Manual detailed Before using the CD ROM please read the following to ensure the proper use E System requirements The system for using the CD ROM requires the following Windows OS Microsoft Windows 98 Windows 98SE Windows NT 4 0 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP or later CPU Pentium processor 133MHz Memory 32MB or more Macintosh OS Mac OS 10 2 or later CPU PowerPC Memory 32MB or more CD ROM drive 4x CD ROM drive Display 256 color 640x480 dots resolution Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 and Adobe Acrobat Reader 4 0 or later E How to use the CD 1 Insert CD into computer s CD ROM drive ENGLISH ral Windows In a while Web browser automatically starts Start up window comes up Macintosh 1 Double click on the Projectors icon appeared on the desktop screen 2 When main html file is clicked Web browser will start and Initial window will appear 2 Click the model name of your projector first and then click language you want from the displayed list The User s manual detailed will open ACAUTION P Only use the CD ROM in a computer CD dr
317. your computer SUBNET This function can only be used when DHCP is set MASK to OFF e The SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A W lt gt buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY a node on a computer network that DEFAULT serves as an access point to another network GATEWAY _ address ariel This function can only be used when DHCP is set continued to OFF Use the A W lt gt buttons to input the DNS server address DNS SERNER The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network Use the A V buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one LE set on your computer If unsure consult your IT DIFFERENCE y i y manager Use the gt button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE Use the A W lt gt buttons to enter the Year last two digits Month Date Hour and Minute DATE AND The projector will override this setting and retrieve TIME DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled Date Time Settings in the User s Manual Network Guide continued on next page 65 1 Use the A F buttons on the NETWORK menu to select the PROJECTOR NAME and press the gt button The PROJECTOR NAME dialog will be displayed 2 The current PROJECTOR NAME will be EEI on the first 3 lines Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Use the A gt buttons and the ENTER or INPU

Hitachi CP-X5021N

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents